Home

Instruction Manual

1. Table 5 IEC101 REG PE D Settings SCADA interface settings Setting Format Range Default Description Serial port COM1 Selection of serial port This op tion is disabled selection is done in the Serial port assignment branch Baud rate of serial Bd Selection 19200 Baud rate of serial port port IEC of values in combo box Parity Selection EVEN Serial port parity of values in combo box ON time of serial ms 1to 100 10 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs RS485 activated checkbox unchecked Activation of RS485 RTS CTS checkbox unchecked Activation of RTS CTS handshaking XON XOFF checkbox unchecked Activation of XON XOFF handshaking Table 6 IEC101 REG PE D Settings SCADA protocol settings Setting Format Range Default Description Link address of 1to 254 1 Link address of REG PE D range REG PE D 1 to 65534 is dependent on Link address size ASDU address 1to 254 1 ASDU address of REG PE D 1 to 65534 range is dependent on ASDU address size Link address size Byte Selection 1 Link address size of values in combo box ASDU address Byte Selection 2 ASDU address size size of values in combo box Info address size Byte Selection 3 Info address size of values in combo box Use originator 0 checkbox unchecked Usage of originator Max length of Byte 1to 255 200 Maximum length of telegram telegram Link status ms 2 to 1000 Link status timeout timeout First char
2. gt aia Properties IED Project ek e IS in template JR p Name Value ag DO Regl24ct o name ctlModel valKind S KM DOI Regt lac Val sbo with enhanced security HAZ DO TapChaDown Ag P DON TapChaUp a oz DON Unurv e Age DON BOSw4 S ar DO BOSw3 f Control Model Editor E gr D0I BOSw2 Common S KM ie 3 Control Model direct with normal security m ai Ag DON VrtCmdo1 E DAN stal sbo Timeout The type does not contain these DAN ctIModel sbo Class SE SDI Oper nformation DO Typeld weg d StdSPC fa e og EEE Figure 114 Excluded attributes for selected direct control model Page 188 IEC61850 20 2 11 20 2 11 1 IEC61850 GOOSElight Support a eberle A GOOSElight contains the settings for Publisher and Subscriber sides These are different and perform different functions SCL_Config provides the ability to create to edit to adjust and to save all settings for both sides All functions are available on GOOSElight page of appli cation All GOOSE settings are saved in form of param files for project type Archive Tar inside archive jffs2 tar for project type WinConfig in settings file xml as CData sections File Tools Help Project cl a el 9 CAvsers starCvC Documents SCLConfig Project ebere43 Goose 20110826 Tasks Configuration GOOSE Light ICDfile Log
3. Reject commands with unknown address 7 Balanced specific Use balanced mode Use unbalanced mode Figure 17 Settings SCADA IEC101 REG P IEC101 settings Page 49 We take care of it Table 3 Settings SCADA IEC101 REG P Setting Format Range Default Description IEC receiver in option box NOT selected Inversion of RxD signal verted IEC transmitter option box NOT selected Inversion of TxD signal inverted IEC RTS signal option box NOT selected Inversion of RTS signal inverted IEC CTS signal option box NOT selected Inversion of CTS signal inverted IEC RS485 termi option box NOT selected Activation of RS485 bus termina nator activated tor IEC RS485 acti option box NOT selected Activation of RS485 interface vated option This option is not func tional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers IEC fiber optics option box NOT selected Activation of fiber optics interface activated option This option is not func tional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers IEC RS232 used option box selected Activation of RS232 interface option This option is not func tional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers Baud rate of IEC Bd Selection 9600 Baud rate of IEC101 serial port serial of values in combo box ON time of serial 10 ms 1 to 100 1 ON time of seri
4. RMI NIN RM NINN NH Configuration GOOSE Licht We _ GOOSE Control Blocks Object Editors General settings for GOOSE i Ei GOOSE ight Extemal Publisher Configuration D GoCb_RegATCC SE Subscriber activate EI GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration REG PEID Subsorber Index 0 15 0 ERE oe oy TE een ES AAG Num 3 GGIO 2 Ind2 stVal AAG Num 4 GGIO 2 Ind2 q AAG Num 5 GGIO 2 Ind3 stVal 9 Num 6 GGIO 2 Ind3 q Ag Num 7 GGIO 2 Ind4 stVal 9 Num 8 GGIO 2 Ind4 q gebST GooseST Application ID dec hex H 0 H Failure Handling Failure service interval ms 4000 After first GOOSE message 1 Objects will be initialized 1 Objects will be initialized 2 Their commands will be executed Failure detection commands At publisher timeout detection this command will be sent Bee F publisher is received successfully again this command will be sent These Commands will be sent to Logical Device Station LDevice A N Comment Figure 151 Add Subscriber from other ICD file IEC61850 Page 223 We take care of it The detailed settings of one subscriber described below Table 88 GOOSE subscribed stream settings Unit Range Standard Description ET Order No dec From1 It defines selected number and used to quick se input num up to lect a subscriber ber to 16 selec
5. Slave Address Unit ID 2 Device Identifier of device 1 Jan Confirm Reset Figure 81 Modbus TCP basic settings Table 60 MODBUS TCP basic settings Setting Format Range Default Description Settings de Text 50 characters Filename of Short user description of scription open settings settings file or name of set tings file Unit Id 1 247 2 Slave Address same as the Unit ID used in MODBUS TCP IP Identifier of text AA or A 1 to 9 defaults defined Device identifier string as device to Z 1 to 4 in the Devices appears in the device proto tree branch col The port number is default 502 Page 152 Modbus settings a eberle A 18 3 Advanced Settings SCADA Advanced settings tree branch contains the complete range of MODBUS settings MODBUS Interface settings Serial port COM e Baud rate of serial pot MODBUS Bd 19200 v Parity EVEN e ON time of serial LEDs ms 20 RS485 activated RTSICTS XON XOFF mM Protocol settings Slave address 2 Response timeout ms 5 Turnaround delay ms 250 No reply D Mode of watchdog LED blinking e Confirm Reset Figure 82 MODBUS SCADA settings Modbus settings Page 153 We take care of it Table 61 MODBUS advanced settings Setting Format Range Default Description Serial port Selection of COM1 Selection of available COM ports for valu
6. Upto 64 sym bols No Commentary for configuration IEC61850 a eberle A Table 90 Boolean conversion rules for GOOSE command Cont Type IEC Boolean Command behaviour value 2 Command without value if got FALSE 20 Command without value if got TRUE 21 Table 91 Double Point conversion rules for GOOSE command Command B21 Conte Type IEC DoublePoint Command behaviour Type Example Double command for bitstring 32 bit inverted 2 Scale Conversion and commands those will be sent 0 default DoublePoint C j behaviour Type Command with value default 0 x 1 DoublePoint Command behaviour Type Double command 1 v IEC61850 Page 229 We take care of it Scale Conversion and commands those will be sent 1 DoublePoint Command behaviour Type Double command inverted 1 v Example if value 00 2 31 Direct Command Rule First CMD will be calculated conform with CMD Bitstring amp 0xC0000000 gt gt scale 2 Then if CMD is 1 command looks same command 0 If CMD is 2 command looks same command 1 For example 1 GOOSE input is 0100000000000 Scale is 13 Command will be completed as command O 2 GOOSE input is 1000001110000000 Scale is 16 Command will be completed as command 1 31 2 Command B21 Cot Type EC DoublePoint Command behaviour Type Double command for bitstring
7. tl en u Figure 54 IEC103 Device x Commands Table 34 IEC103 Device x Data points commands Setting Format Range Default Description Disabled Option box Yes Enabling disabling of individual data es point IOA function 2x 0 to 255 0 The corresponding IEC data type must type infor be entered The Type Identification is mation used for the compatible range number Control code Selection of Type 20 IEC 60870 5 103 type of data values in General combo box command Command string 50 charac empty Command string to be sent to device string ters string REG data type Selection of INT8 Device data type of command values in combo box Scale exponent Selection of 0 Normally scale is used as exponent values in with single commands combo box Only if Maximal Value is O scale has Double Point type with lt 0 gt not used lt 1 gt OFF lt 2 gt ON lt 3 gt not used In either case scale is an enumeration Use method of Selection of Appliedin Application method of command val command value values in command ue If ignored is selected command IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description combo box value will be ignored Description 50 charac empty User description of command ters string 12 5 5 Fault records The terms earth faults and channels are used to describe particular of a sin
8. IEC61850 Page 219 We take care of it Page 220 Standard value Description MAC Ad hex 6 octet IEC61850 Parameter defines the multicast data link desti dress 8 nation address for a first IEC GOOSE Control destination Block from GSE Section in ICD file of GOOSE messages Application Hex From 0 Ox3ED The parameter defines VLAN APPLD which iden ID dec upto2 or tifies a using the VLAN 802 1q for a first IEC GOOSE Control Block from GSE Section in ICD 1001 in file decimal EN For detailed information see please IEC61850 8 1 notation VLAN ID Hex From 0 0 The parameter defines the unique identified of dec upto2 VLAN ID 802 1q 0 indicates that the tag header contains only user priority information no VLAN ID 1 Default PVID value used for classifying frames on ingress through a bridge port FFF Reserved for implementation use VLAN Priori dec From 0 4 The parameter defines the VLAN Priority as 3 bit ty up to 7 binary number representing 8 priority levels 0 7 802 1q GOOSE Retransmission Strategy Default Step ms 0 65535 500 Parameter defines minimal timeout for IEC Delay Goose service Service function checks all chang es in a poll of the Goose published Data Points and activates Goose transmission in any case It activates retransmission even if the settings of retransmission strategies are not set Retransmis list geometriciv geometric Selection
9. aa q20 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Binary command without space inverted 5 Z 1 IEC61850 Page 207 We take care of it Scale IEC Value Conversion Default 0 False command 0 Default 0 True command 1 aa q20 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Command Behavior Type Binary command without space default 0 v En aetan aanta If IEC Type of command is DOUBLEPOINT scale parameter will be used as shown below 4 Command with value default 0 Binary command with value 112 1 Binary command with value inverted 211 4 Double command with value 0112 2 Double command with value 0111213 3 Double command with value inverted 211 5 Page 208 1EC61850 a eberle A Table 83 Double Point conversion rules for command convert ctlVal Scale IEC Value Conversion 1 00 Negative response 1 01 command 0 1 10 command 1 1 11 Negative response 2 00 command 0 2 01 command 1 2 10 command 2 2 11 Negative response 3 unused value Instead 00 command 0 of this a default value is 01 command 1 used 10 command 2 11 command 3 4 00 Negative response 4 01 command 1 4 10 command 0 4 11 Negative response 5 00 Negative response 5 01 command 2 5 10 command 1 5 11 Negative response Default value command valu
10. Command string text 50 chars empty Command string RegSys type selection of val BOOL RegSys type of command ues in combo box Scale exponent selection of val 0 Scale exponent ues in combo box 100 value decimal 0 to 65535 0 100 value available for T148 only Description text 48 chars empty User description Editing the IOA in columns In Order to change the IOA high middle or low byte in the entire column in the indications or commands table click the right mouse button in the IOA hi mi lo table textbox The fol lowing option table will appear on the screen Information object sa Abs wee IOA hi mi lo jeviati Scale IOA 8193 ol 8194 0 8195 0 8197 0 8198 0 Figure 32 Editing the IOA bytes in entire columns To set the corresponding bytes to the desired value use the first option To increase corresponding bytes by the desired value use the first option To decrease corresponding bytes by the desired value use the first option If the increased or decreased value of any of the table rows exceeds the valid range the function will be aborted and a warning message will appear on the screen IEC101 settings Page 67 We take care of it 10 4 5 Status Status bits describe bit indication generated by a eberle device Bits are arranged in the 32 bit table with predefined meaning of individual lines Entire table
11. Link address of DNP3 master RS485 activated Device Identifier of device 1 faa 103 1 o Confirm Reset Figure 72 DNP3 basic settings REG PE D serial v 19200 si a eberle A Table 51 DNP3 basic settings REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description Settings descrip text 50 characters Identification Short user description of tion if the tem settings file plate source Line type selection of serial Type of communication line values in com serial Ethernet TCP Ethernet bo box UDP Authorized cen 4x 0 to 255 192 168 1 68 IP addresses of central sta tral stations IP 192 168 1 64 tions authorized to connect addresses 192 168 1 43 to telecontrol board Baud rate of serial Bd selection of 19200 Baud rate of serial port DNP port DNP3 values in com bo box Link address of 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG P REG P Link address of 0 to 65535 1 Link address of DNP master DNP3 master RS485 activated option box not selected RS485 activated Identifier of de text AA or A 1 to AA Identifier of device vice 9 to Z 1 to 4 DNP3 settings REG PE D Page 139 We take care of it 15 2 Advanced 15 2 1 Settings SCADA The advanced tree branch SCADA setting contains complete DNP3 specific communication settings Interface settings Line type serial Serial port COM1 v Baud rate of serial port DNP3 Bd
12. Setting Format Range Default Description IP address 4x 1 to 254 1 IP address of telecontrol board Netmask 4x 1 to 254 1 Network mask of telecontrol board Gateway Selection of values 19200 Default gateway of telecontrol board in combo box Page 266 WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle Za WEEN AC ick hel 3 DNP3 ng Please configure your protocol The Baud rate defines the data communication speed Most common values are 9600 baud F and 19200 baud In general it is defined by Baud rate 9600 S SCADA engineer Link address of REGSys be 77 Link address of REGSys er The Link address defines the DNP3 0 name of the telecontrol board This address is defined by SCADA engineer and is necessary for device identification and communication Use COM Server function Please refer to your SCADA engineer if you do not know the Link address of the telecontrol Don t use COM Server function board Link address of DNP3 master This is the DNP3 0 Link address of the SCADA System which is allowed to communicate with the telecontrol board Please refer to your SCADA engineer if you do not know the Link address of the SCADA System Link address of DNP3 master 1 cance gt Lassa d comme Figure 170 Protocol selection DNP3 Table 106 DNP3 settings Setting Default Description Baud rate Selection of val 19200 Baud rate of DNP3 serial port ues in combo box Link address of
13. Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P a eberle A 11 2 Devices 11 2 1 Converter Errors Only one device error is available as IEC103 conversion firmware can manage only one a eberle device at a time Converter errors ID Comment IOA function type information number 0 Device 1 communication error jo 710 multipoint jo rlo Figure 35 IEC103 converter errors 11 3 Device x 11 3 1 Device request settings This tree branch contains IEC103 specific device settings Identifier ofthe device A Poll type RPS v Poll string RPS 3 IEC COT template 2 RPS specific Size of answer 244 Offset of seconds field 18 Offset of msec field ECH Figure 36 IEC103 device request settings Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P Page 73 We take care of it Table 18 IEC103 device settings Setting Format Range Default Description Identifier of de text AA or A 1to AA Identifier of device as appears vice 9 to Z 1 to in the device communication 4 Poll type selection of RPS Device poll type values in combo box Poll string text 23 chars RPS 3 Device poll string RPS specific Size byte 1to 255 244 Size of answer of answer RPS specific Off byte Oto 255 18 Offset of seconds field set of seconds field RPS specific Off byte Oto 255 22 Offset of msec field set of msec field Page 74 Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P
14. The Supervisory settings tree branch can be used for activation and configuration of debug logs Supervisory COM Server Trace Activate trace F Level User v Trace via PARAM Connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended TCP port 5010 Logging with Timestamp Performance reduction oO COM Server Tx Rx Mirroring Activate trace TCP port 5011 Figure 79 CSO channels REG PE D Table 58 CSO Supervisory settings Setting Format Range Default Description Activate checkbox checked Protocol debug option activation Level Selection of val user Option to select lever of supervi ues in combo box sory messages user developer Verbose Output checkbox unchecked Verbose Output Trace via radio button checked Logging to PARAM Connector PARAM Connector Trace via TCP radio button unchecked Logging to TCP port Port TCP port 1 to 65535 55555 TCP port Logging with checkbox checked Logging with Timestamp Timestamp Mirror port checkbox checked Mirror port Activate Activate trace TCP port 1 to 65535 55444 TCP port CSO settings REG PE D a eberle A 18 Modbus settings You are able to select of either two connection type serial or TCP 18 1 Basic settings MODBUS RTU Basic settings tree branch form contains common settings of MODBUS protocol selection
15. To import settings from WinConfig exported Excel file browse the file by using the Browse button and click Import button in the Import settings from WinConfig exported Excel file frame Work with protocol settings Page 29 We take care of it Page 30 9 2 3 9 2 4 Open settings Open settings from file XML file name ICD file name Import settings from WinConfig exported Excel file Import from external sources Board type REG P TK400 ei Open settings from aplication TAR file Convert settings from GenReg ini file SCH Figure 6 Open settings Remove Save Click the Remove button to remove the selected settings from the settings tree Click the Save button to save selected settings to a WinConfig XML settings file Select fold er and type the settings file name in the dialog box Transfer settings from to a PC explained The following ways of data transfer are available Serial transfer via a eberle device for example a REG D regulator using serial booter firmware saved in the telecontrol board memory available for boards TK5xx and TK400 Ethernet TCP transfer using Ethernet bbooter firmware saved in the telecontrol board memory available for TK400 boards Ethernet transfer can be used in local mode with manual board reset or in remote mode with automatic reset available for TK400 tele control boards with COM SERVER or CSO
16. defined settings Local path to Option box not selected Option enables selection of WinConfig xml WinConfig xml file Browse file button Local path to Option box not selected Option enables selection of GenReg ini file GenReg ini file Browse but ton WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 263 We take care of it Hardware BEE Devices Download Finishing 2 Protocol Karen a Please select your protocol EEN J Woridwide standard protocol for Troano mode communication between SCADA and control center Available connection types are RS232 RS485 and fiber optics Ven on SI DESS Communication speeds up to 19200 Baud a are possible Device configurations are SCADA template Idle state marginal dependent on SCADA Every REG D A Ed 1 Standard Configuratic v telecontrol card type can access several eberle devices Attached Eberle devices IEC 60870 5 103 This protocol is based on the DIN EN 60870 and was designed for the specific functions of protection devices Available connection types are RS232 RS 485 and fiber optic Communication speeds up to 19200 Baud are possible Device configurations are dependent on SCADA Every telecontrol card type can access only a single eberle Device IEC 60870 5 104 Figure 166 Selection of protocol and templates x Page 264 WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle lt 21 4 Protocol specific settings User enter
17. nenn ar 139 Advanced settings SCADA REG PEIDL 140 DNP3 device request settings REG PEID 142 DNP3 indications REG PE D ccccsccccccssscecsesssceceesseceeseseeeeecsaeeesecsaeeeesesaeeeseesaeeeeeesaeeeeeea 143 DNP3 commands REG PE D cccccccccecsssceceessececeesceeceeseeeeceesaeeececsaeeeceesaeeeceesaeeeceesaeeeeeses 145 CSO settings REG P en 146 CSO channels REG PE D eeneg EES 148 CSO channels REG DEID prins tiri tonr ETETE NEEE 150 MODBUS RTU basic settings c cccccccscsssssssecececeseeseceaeeeeecesseseuaeseceeecessesauaeaeeeessessesesaeess 151 Modbus TCP basic settings nennen 152 MODBUS SCADA Settings Edert e eaea saae aaae aaie ENEE e EE 153 Device internal communication settings 155 MODBUS device request settings cccccesssssecececeseesecseaeeeeecessesseaeaeceeecesseseaaeseeeeeesssesenaeeas 156 List of Figures Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 a eberle MODBUS indications
18. 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 a eberle A IEC103 settings REG PE D Here you are able to set the settings related to IEC60870 5 103 IEC60870 5 103 protocol is a multipoint protocol This means that one Master can com municate with multiple Slaves on the same communication line Due to this a given slave must have a unique ID to which it responds a device Link address A slave s device address shall be unique on a given communication network duplicate addresses lead to bus colli sion Device addresses must lie in the range 1 to 254 For broadcast Send no reply service must be used by master and the Link address field is defined as 255 One Frame contains not more than one Application Service Data Unit ASDU Common IEC 60870 5 103 Conformity The size contents and values of information fields of ASDU Application Service Data Unit are set and used according to IEC 60870 5 4 103 Supported Type Identifications The following types are supported Information in monitor direction Type POISYS REGSYS EORSYS Devices Devices lt 1 gt time tagged message o lt 4 gt time tagged measurements with relative time v v lt 5 gt identification y v lt 6 gt time synchronization v v lt 8 gt general interrogation termination v v lt 9 gt measurements II y v lt 23 gt list of recorded disturbances x v lt 26 gt ready for transmission of disturbance data x
19. 15 000 15 000 0 000 E 15 000 15 000 0 000 Receive a Open E zend Save Print Manual 91 POI D PQI D 5 0 04 3 12 05 31 Q1 FREAD pqi 2 9502726 TPQIPanOnlCurve 1837146 Figure 42 Online graphic disturbance data from PQI D With this new type of telecontrol card you are able to have the following operation modes now JEC only JEC and COM Server at the same time where IEC is regarded of higher priority COM Server only These operation modes are online changeable without need of changing settings i e if you have mostly IEC communication operation mode only you will be able to use from time to Page 88 IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 3 4 a eberle A time additionally the COM Server functionality e g for retrieving saved recorder data via WinReg not supported yet for EORSys and PQI D Another application case is an outage of IEC line in this case you will be able to connect to COM Server via WinReg and retrieve im portant data from regulator during the IEC outage The COM Server also may be used for maintenance purposes with any standard terminal program A disturbance data receiving from PQI D can last sufficiently long up to 1 2 min The IEC control center does not receive the information at same time because PQI D gives out the data in output stream A size of output stream in COM Server optimized and set to 2 Kbytes For example the transmi
20. ASDU address 1 Ve kees i hi lo IEC RS485 activated oO IEC fiber optics activated IEC RS232 used idle mode of fiber optics is switched by accordant setting Device Identifier of device 1 AA Figure 16 IEC101 basic settings IEC101 settings Page 47 We take care of it Page 48 Table 2 IEC101 basic settings Setting Format Range Default Description Settings de text 50 charac Filename of Short user description of settings scription ters open settings file or name of settings file Baud rate of Bd Selection of 9600 Baud rate of IEC101 serial port serial port IEC values in combo box Link address of 0 to 255 1 Link address displayed as word or REG P or set oftwo bytes The range is 0 to 65535 determined by the Link address size option in advanced settings ASDU address Oto 255 1 ASDU address displayed as word or or set of two bytes The range is 0 to 65535 determined by the ASDU address size option found in advanced settings IEC RS485 acti option box NOT selected Activation of RS485 interface vated option This option is greyed out and not functional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers IEC fiber optics option box NOT selected Activation of fiber optics interface activated option This option is greyed out and not functional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers IEC RS232 used option box selected Activation of RS232 int
21. IEC61850 Internal communication ueuersssessessnnnenensnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 250 Table 100 IS e NERT e ee eine dn aceastelecetds ete Uedecai need 252 Table 101 Protocols and templates ersinnen isses Enasi saa aiaiai is Enaps ES 255 Table 102 Settings of protocols and templates 263 Table 103 IS ef WT 265 Table 104 IECIOS settings REGSP unse ern Ride 266 Table 105 CSO Settings REG E 266 Table 106 DNP3 Settings u en re e 267 Table 107 Timesynchronization ene eur nennen 267 Table 108 Diagnostic functions in the context of the device cccccecccecessesssseceeeceseesesseaeeeeeeeseeeees 272 List of Tables Page 283 We take care of it Page 284 List of Tables a eberle Notes Notes Page 285 We take care of it Page 286 Notes a eberle Notes Page 287 a eberle A Eberle GmbH amp Co KG Frankenstra e 160 D 90461 Nuremberg Germany Tel 49 0 911 62 81 08 0 Fax 49 0 911 62 81 08 96 E Mail info a eberle de http www a eberle de Software Version Version 11 0 6 Creation Date 2008 02 15 Release Date 2015 08 06 Copyright 2015 by A Eberle GmbH amp Co KG Subject to change without prior notice Configuration of Telec
22. Setting Format Range Default Description LDevice In text Uppercase no The parameter defines device identifica stance in ICD up to 10 tion by its number It must be the same file char as the IEC61850 Logical Device LD instance number e g logical device name REG2 must have value 2 for De vice relocation Identifier of text AA or A 1 to AA The parameter defines an XXXSysTM device 9 to Z 1 to Device name The name should consist 4 of 2 or 3 characters A template of the name is A Z empty or 0 9 E g F A8 V7 By default it is A for regulators Poll string text 24 charac RPS 4 The parameter defines a poll string for a ters serial request By default it is RPS 4 for attached regulators for other devices it is preconfigured in a different way Size of answer byte 1to 255 244 The parameter defines a size of answer corresponding to selected poll string Type of seconds Selection of Int32U The parameter defines type of a se field values in cond s value in defined poll string combo box Default value REGSys INT32 Offset of se byte Oto 255 18 The parameter defines the byte offset in conds field defined poll string which includes a second s part of time Default value is 18 Type of msec Selection of Int32U The parameter defines type of a milli field values in seconds part of time in poll string combo box De
23. TCP port Inactivity timeout s Sera port Baud rate Parity XONIKOFF RTSICTS o Yes E Socket En 5001 ee Ger 115200 v d KIEA c No O Yes socket 0 0 0 0 5013 180 coms 115200 sl fone No Yes O Yes v socket x 0 0 0 0 5004 1s0 coms 115200 None ves sl no sei O Yes v Tent 0 0 0 0 7003 Loan coma 115200 elle Yes si no m Figure 158 IEC61850 COM Server Extend Rows count 10 Enter Password to Extend eeeeee go TCP port ct tents Sera port Baudrate i part FOE Ge messe ocino 5001 Ian son2 115200 siluene v 1 8 w Yes m no w Nno w No DE St o 5002 Ten om1 118200 m None zl 1 v 8 elle no no e or Rs232 v o o 5003 180 COM3 115200 None 1 v s si Yes v No zw no iv No EISE jo 5013 180 sous 115200 im None w 1 8 No el Yes w No w No RS232 v 16 10 Figure 159 IEC61850 COM Server Extended IEC61850 a eberle A Table 96 IEC61850 COM Server Setting Format Range Default Description Activate Selection of values Option to activate the CS channel in combo box Yes No Connection Selection of values Type of connection type in combo box OFF
24. Trace via TCP Port recommended TCP Port 10888 Logging with Timestamp Performance reduction EI COM Server Tx Rx Mirroring Activate trace TCP port Page 164 C37 118 Settings a eberle A Figure 91 C37 118 Supervisory settings C37 118 Settings Page 165 We take care of it Page 166 Table 70 C37 118 Supervisory settings Setting Format Range Default Description Level Selection of Deactivate Level of Log messages values in combo box Trace output radio button PARAM Option to trace via PARAM connector connector or via TCP Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Level of Log in device communi Link Layer cation Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Level of Log in device communi Application Layer cation C37 118 protocol checkbox unchecked Level of Log in C37 118 protocol Link Layer communication C37 118 protocol checkbox unchecked Level of Log in C37 118 protocol Application Layer communication DCF77 Activate checkbox unchecked Trace activation trace DCF77 Level Selection of Deactivate Level of Log messages values in combo box DCF77 TCP port 1 to 65535 10777 TCP port COM Server checkbox checked Protocol debug option activa Trace Activate tion trace Level Selection of user Option to select lever of super values in visory messages user combo box developer Trace via PARAM radio button checked Logging to PARAM Connector Connector
25. User si Trace options Activate trace Trace Output Trace vis PARAM connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended TCP File TCP Port Log to File Attention Available memory on board very limited oO Logging with Timestamp Attention Causes performance reduction C CSE Trace Activate U TCP Port DCF77 Trace Activate U TCP Fort COM Server Trace Activate Trace oO Trace Output oO Trace via PARAM Connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended oO TCP Port 10897 Logging with Timestamp Performance reduction COM Server Tx Rx Mirroring Activate TCP port Page 242 IEC61850 a eberle A Figure 160 IEC61850 Supervisory settings IEC61850 Page 243 We take care of it Table 97 IEC61850 Supervisory settings Setting Format Range Default Description Level Selection of user Option to select lever of superviso values in ry messages user developer combo box Activate trace checkbox checked Protocol debug option activation Trace output radio TCP port Selection of trace output PARAM button connector or TCP port TCP Port 1 to 65535 10689 TCP port Log to file checkbox unchecked Log to file Logging with checkbox unchecked Logging with timestamp timestamp Page 244
26. serial LEDs Inter character ms 1 to 65535 80 Inter character timeout timeout Time to wait ms 1 to 65535 30 Time to wait after answer reception after answer rec Number of 1to 255 2 Number of repeats for SYNC cycle repeats for SYNC cycle Number of poll 0 to 255 1 Number of poll repeats repeats Round time Check box NOT Round time down down checked Number of polls Oto 255 16 Frequency of interrogation of IP ad for IP check dresses of all devices Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is 0 setting is not used Earth fault ac ms Option box Yes Earth fault acquisition activate quisition es If On set all data with earth faults on off will be transmitted from current device to control center Otherwise this fea ture not supported and off Note the feature supported now only for EORSys devices Initial delay of ms 0 to 65535 2000 Max wait for repetition of the initial first sample state of device to start state machine request Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 800 ms Earth fault ac s 0 to 65535 100 Max wait for repetition of new Earth quisition Faults samples request from device to timeout start get mode Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 100 sec Delay of List ms 0 to 65535 300 Min timeout in device response in Records trans Earth Faults transmit to control center mission with type identificati
27. 10ms Inter character timeout ms o TX blocking ms Figure 77 CSO settings REG P Page 146 CSO settings REG P Table 56 CSO settings REG P a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Settings descrip text 50 charac Filename of Short user description of set tion ters open settings tings file or name of settings file Local REG P IP 4x 0 to 255 192 168 56 90 Local REG P IP address address Gateway IP ad 4x 0 to 255 192 168 1 43 IP address of default gateway dress Subnet mask 4x 0 to 255 255 255 0 0 Subnet mask Accept any valid checkbox checked Accept any valid client IP client IP Refuse second checkbox checked Refuse second connection if connection other connection is already set Otherwise the current connec tion is closed and the new one established Authorized cen 4x Oto 255 0 0 0 0 IP address of authorized central tral stations IP stations 6 available addresses addresses TCP port data 1 to 65535 1023 TCP port for data transfer transfer Changing of this value is not recommended UDP port remote 1 to 65535 12000 UDP port for remote parame parameterization terization Changing of this value is not recommended Baud rate of de Bd selection of 115200 Baud rate of device serial com vice serial values in munication Device settings are combo box accessible after clicking the Enable button Experienced staff should do
28. E Memory allocation E mopem 0 2 sec average 3 sec average EN 50160 events Vector diagram Direction harmonic power 49 997 Hz 116 1 V 75 3 V 113 7 V 190 6 V 42 5 V 88 5 V 94 551 116 1 V 3 7 A Online visualization WReceive Open Send save Print Manual Q1 PQI D PQI D 5 0 04 i3 13 18 04 Q1 FREAD pqi2 20316166 Figure 41 Online data Overview via REG PE D COM Server ComServer a PQPara EXE STD ID E Programme WinPQ MASK POQParaVisu_13 DDF File Edit Help Bro TPQIPanOnIPanel C3s ID 2009 05 30 12 05 27 1795 RR 31 ERR 0 NI 258443 AI 258418 a gt Q1 PQI D PQI D 5 C Overview online graphic offline table Memory allocation Overview Online visualization J Offline table E Menu 2 Refresh 1 2009 05 29 18 23 58 e Hy Cursor M Marker H 18 23 58 Trigger by software 15 Memory allocation E monem i 0 2 sec average 3 sec average Reca 100 s values Rece 10 ms values Rec5 Ripple control voltage mmen 29 05 2009 i 28 05 29 05 2009 List1 4096 18 23 58 397ms 18 23 59 4704 18 23 58 6418 23 58 7000 18 23 58 7500 18 23 58 8000 18 23 58 9500 18 23 58 9000 18 23 58 9500 18 23 59 0090 460V H H i 470V 460V 470V 460 470V 460V 154 15A 154 15A 470 000 0 000 460 000 470 000 0 000 460 000 470 000 0 000 460 000 470 000 0 000 UI
29. LN Harmonic backward GR EY LN Pulse forward GGIO 5 LN Wattmetric forward GGID I Er LN Wattmetric backward GGIO Y H LN Detection 1 GGID 8 H Remove LNode Figure 105 Adding deleting and renaming logical nodes IEC61850 Page 177 We take care of it 20 2 5 Editing sAddr Upon choosing DAI stVal on the right panel sAddr Editing parameters editor of sAddr field is available To accept changes of the parameters press OK to cancel the changes press Cancel Age DO wiry BAZ DON WwiRv2 sAddr Editor a oa DON Wihv3 og G age DON WiRv4 Functional constraint ST Mx Status Measurands ge DON wiRvS IEC type for reporting BOOLEAN iv Ea Device intemal data type BIT_4 BYTE ix evice internal data e v e oe DON WIRVE E ar DON wihv Data mapping in device Yes No not mapped in internal data ar DON wirve Dead band value 0 mm oi DON WIRVI gen e ar DON WIRVIO Process dead band as percentage deviation x 3 97 DON WRI Offset 19 ge DON w l Ausiliary Group D AZ e DON WIRVII emp HAZ DON WIRvVIE ey DONWIRvIS Publish in IEC GOOSE Yes No nat published in GOOSE aH Age DON WIRVIE v Figure 106 Editing sAddr Such editors are accessible for the use ICD Template sAddr Type ASCIIx61850 Record Type ST Status Measurands Properties IED Project Name Value name s
30. List of GOOSE light External Publishers The application allows subscribing from 1 up to 16 external publishers as GOOSE partners for REG PE REG PED The external GOOSE lightpublishers are complying with a specifica tion of REG PE REG PED inner Subscribers The GOOSE lightSubscribers List pane contains full information about the subscribed GOOSE streams L GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration E ite lk Gr im af Ms 4 bi Idx 0 lt New gt Nad GE ldx 1 lt New gt en Idx 2 lt New gt Figure 150 GOOSE lightSubscribers pane SCL_Config is able to create Publisher from ICD file as shown below wut avanauie GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration E fel Gi af 4 Select ICD file gt OW Ji Computer WORK D WorkTable ICDs P444 4 Search Pasa Organize v New folder DN e CG Business Name ii Date modified ctrlprj R a En 8 Areva_P444_ICD icd 11 09 2008 09 06 Libraries E Documents am Git adi Music Pictures Ell Subversion E Videos s Homegroup BP Computer amp WINDOWS C ca WORK D ca APPL E File name X ICD ICD IEC61850 Add GOOSE Publisher a eberle Ze Publisher ICD Select ICD 15 DAWorkTable ICDs P444 Wreva_P444 ICDicd
31. Value is configurable in the range 0 254 The default value is 1 Value 255 is reserved for broadcast mes sages with Send no reply coding ASDU address 1to 254 201 Enter aCommon Address Application Service Data Unit ASDU The Common Address shall usually be identical to the address used in the link address Range of setting is from O up to 254 The default value is 1 For broadcast Send no re ply services of the master are mandatory In this case the ASDU address field is defined as 255 Therefore value 255 is not allowed as specific device ad dress Timeout after ms Oto 1500 The setting determines a maximal waiting command recep 65535 time for acknowledgement of the com tion mand in control direction If a command message is received before the previous command has been acknowledged it will be rejected with negative acknowledge ment of command Commands that cannot be processed for various reasons will be rejected with negative acknowl edgement Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 1500 setting is not used First character ms 0 to 25 Time of first character Page 82 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Setting Range Default Description timeout 65535 Max timeout Oto 255 0 Maximum timeout between master en between master quires requests IEC address of O to 255 162 If a protection device sends the error error multipoint m
32. We take care of it Page 94 Setting Format Range Default Description values in combo box Stop bits Selection of 1 Stop bits values in combo box Data bits Selection of 8 Data bits values in combo box XON XOFF Selection of No Option to select XON XOFF values in handshaking combo box RTS CTS Selection of No Option to select RTS CTS hand values in shaking combo box RTS CTS inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RTS CTS signals combo box Rxd TxD inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RxD TxD signals combo box Interface type Selection of RS232 Option to select type of inter values in face combo box Max message 0 to 65535 0 Max message length length Tx blocking time ms 0 to 65535 0 Tx blocking time IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 3 6 Supervisory settings a eberle A IEC103 firmware for TK8xx telecontrol boards can be parameterized to send diagnostic su pervisory messages These messages are sent to the parameterization port of telecontrol board Logging level and type of messages can be set in the Supervisory settings window contained in the IEC103 settings Logging level can be set to ERROR WARNING INFORMATION or DE BUG mode in the combo box and individual types or messages can be selected by checkboxes Supervisory Trace options Level Deactivate VW Trace Output Trace via
33. o Add DO to ICD from Template DO Ind mm acd KEE gt e ku HR RI RR E22 un amp E dd d Figure 108 Restore Data Objects from template IEC61850 20 2 8 IEC61850 a eberle A Renaming Data Objects 7 is in template Rename node x New name Inat k St ale JE og WLN LLND LLNO E H H H H E Figure 109 Renaming the Data Objects Algorithm of renaming DO 1 verifications of old name Mandatory DO list for LPHD Logical Node PhyNam PhyHealth Proxy for other Mod Beh Health NamPlt A change the name is blocked If DO is system confirmation of operation is required A not system DO has a DA with name dataNs iCD can have more than one of Logical Node same type that means all these DO will be renamed List of LN will be shown and confirmation of operation is required List of Logical Nodes 4 a the name of DO will be changed LD EOR D master relay 1 E1 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 2 E2 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 3 E3 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 4 E4 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 5 E5 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 6 E6 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 7 E7 LN Transient forward
34. 10 DCF77 clock activate OYes No Device synchronization specific Strategy of the device time synchronization ai only attached device only the following list List of synchronized devices Sync period of connected devices min 3 Figure 161 IEC61850 Time synchronization 1EC61850 IEC61850 a eberle A Table 98 IEC61850 Time synchronization Setting Format Range Default Description NTP primary serv 4x Oto 255 192 168 1 NTP primary server IP address er IP address 140 NTP secondary 4x Oto 255 192 168 1 NTP secondary server IP address server IP address 5 Period between sec Selection 16 sec Period between the attempts to set the attempts to of values the clock set the clock in combo box Max timeout for sec Selection 1 sec Max timeout for the server response the server re of values sponse in combo box Number of time Selection 3 samples Number of time samples in each clock samples in each of values cycle clock cycle in combo box Minimal time sec float 0 000001 Minimal time offset of clock relative to offset of clock server relative to server Scale for estima 1 Scale for estimation of the NTP offset tion of the NTP worth offset worth DCF77 Version DCF77 Version Read only DCF77 clock acti Radio No DCF77 clock activate vate button Strategy of device Selection Only at The Firmware includes a very flexible time synchroniza of check t
35. 26 For service contact A Eberle Service address A Eberle GmbH amp Co KG Frankenstra e 160 D 90461 Nuremberg Disposal To dispose ofthe device and its accessories send all components to A Eberle Product Warranty A Eberle guarantees that this product and accessories will remain free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from the date of purchase This warranty does not cover damage caused by accident misuse or abnormal operating conditions To obtain service during the warranty period please contact A Eberle GmbH amp Co KG in Nu remberg Maintenance Cleaning 27 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 a eberle List of Figures The RPE WH OW E 17 Introductory window innen una erden under 26 Settings dE 27 Main menu buttons en einmal 28 Add NEW settings aA En 29 Open EES eege 30 Remote transfer from PC REG PB annn nnn 34 Manual transfer from PG nee es ee ne dee e 35 Transfer from PC for telecontrol boards type REG PEID 36 Transler se
36. 32 bit inverted 2 Scale value 2 Example Inverse Command Rule First CMD will be calculated conform with CMD Bitstring amp 0xC0000000 gt gt 2 scale Then if CMD is 1 command looks same command 1 If CMD is 2 command looks same command 0 For example 1 GOOSE input is 0100000000101 Scale is 13 Command will be completed as command 1 2 GOOSE input is 1000000111110000 Scale is 16 Command will be completed as command O Page 230 IEC61850 a eberle A 20 8 WinConfig Settings IEC61850 settings are available for TK860 and TK885D telecontrol boards Settings for IEC61850 protocol consists of XML template and corresponding ICD file Both files are contained in WinConfig and corresponding ICD file is automatically selected to gether with IEC61850 template Data points and commands are defined in ICD file ICD file editor SCL_Config is also part of WC SCL Config and WinConfig share the ED name parameter Intelligent Electronic Device SCL Config can be run from the Settings SCADA tree branch using the Edit ICD file button IED name is automatically transferred back to WinConfig when edit in SCL Config is finished 20 9 Basic The Basic tree branch contains basic settings for IEC61850 Basic Identification string REG Dx1x61850 GOOOSE CS REG PE IED name REGS Description REG D Expor ICD file Device Identifier of device 1 AA NTP spe
37. Abs A Max value a EH Se a DEER IERCH ERC EI il IE mali Ou Erdschl erkannt_general earth fault ident m ny E M If if 0 BECK Sammelmeldung_Transient generalsignal mon E E K E Du p Tr nl in 3 amp A Figure 53 IEC103 Device x a EOR D Table 33 IEC103 Device x Data points indications EOR D Setting Format Range Default Description Disabled Option box No Enabling disabling of individual data es point IOA function 2x 0 to 255 0 IEC address IOA of indication type infor mation number IEC object type Selection of Type 1 IEC data type of data point values in Time tagged combo box message Processing of Selection of value Processing of changes Should be set changes values in to value for EOR D device type combo box REG data type Selection of BITO Selection of regulator data type values in combo box RPS offset Oto 255 0 Definition of RPS offset Dead band float 1 Dead band defines threshold to save new value in process image and to send spontaneous message Scale float 1 Scale exponent value Value normal float 1 Max value of data point accepted in ized for 100 the device communication Use in Gl Selectionof No Option whether the data point will values in be used in Gl combo box Offset connect 0 to 65535 1 REG D EOR D specific setting Defini ed with remote tion of data offset
38. Actions supported by firmware and their usage cccccccccccssececeessececeeaeseceesaeeeeeesaeeeeseaaes 21 SSH ACCESS une eier einen Re 22 Menu and meaning of individual items cccccccscessssssseceeeceseesecnsaeeeeeeesseseaeaeeeeecessessnaees 22 Supported protocols and telecontrol board types cssssccssssccsseccsssccssssccssceseeseeaeees 25 Introductory windoW 053 204400 3800000 0RR 00 00H ans aan sn EEN EREEERNEERSEEREEEE SRN EE EEN EEN 26 Work With protocol settings ee sn sen nein 26 Settings EE 27 M linmenu butt ns urn tee Rebe EES er 28 KE dE 28 Open conversion from INI import from Excel 29 ne VE 30 Transfer settings from to a PC explained ceccccsseceessecesseecseeeeseceeseeceeeeesseeseaeeeeaeeesees 30 Remarks to all Ethernet data transifers nenn 32 TK400 telecontrol board keen 32 TK amp xx tel amp econtrol board 422 ee erh 32 Transfer settings from PC function nennen 34 Transfer settings from PC function for telecontrol boards type REG PE D 35 Transfer settings to PC function ini RiH nalen 38 Table of Contents Page 3 We take care of it Page 4 9 2 11 9 2 12 9 2 13 9 2 14 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 9 5 9 6 10 10 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 4 4 10 4 5 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 2 11 2 1 11 3 11 3 1 12 Change of IP settings for
39. By default set to 0 Command Defines the command string which is assigned with converted IEC control value of scale rule The result is sent to XXXSys device Page 210 IEC61850 20 6 2 3 IEC61850 Pre Conditions a eberle A Command pre conditions define the behavior of check before the control operation They are checked each time before control operation Condition No 1 Condition No 2 Condition No 3 Extended Settings Checked Data Point Type Poll String Offset Checked Value optional Minimal Position optional Maximal Position optional Allowed Command Value to leave minimal Position Allowed Command Value to leave maximal Position Additional Cause Diagnosis IEC61850 8 1 AddCause Same as Checked Value r BIT_7 BYTE 2 3 1 0 0 Blocked by Mode Figure 137 Executing Command Pre Conditions If predicable condition check finished successful control operation continues and command will be sent to device If predicable condition check faulted application sends response and an information report with Last Error cod to client according to a selected control model in ICD file Even if a part of checks finished successful command will be never sent if at least one con dition faulted Selector Condition defines a predicable type by mean of test behavior Condition No 1 Condition No 2 Condition No 3 E
40. D 12 3 5 a eberle A ComServer settings EOR D COM Server m COM Server Use COM Server function Don t use COM Server function O Timeout for response ms 2000 Confirm Reset Add Insert Delete Row count 1 ce pon ine KEEN EH EH TCP pon sc Ke seri port Bava rate Bava rate rate kowxorsierscrs Eee To change serial port interface go to Serial ports assignment page Serial ports assignment Figure 44 ComServer settings EOR D Table 24 IEC103 ComServer settings EOR D Setting Format Range Default Description Use Don t use Option box Don t use Option to select whether Com ComServer func Server will be used tion Timeout for re ms 1 to 65535 2000 Timeout for response sponse Activate Yes No No Option to disable the channel Connection type Selection of RAW State of channel values in SOCKET Serial Direct Telnet combo box Shared with IEC OFF IP address 4x 0 to 255 IP address TCP port 0 to 65535 3003 TCP port Inactivity timeout S 180 Timeout after which the serial device is closed if data transfer does not occur By default is 0 It means that serial device is closed only by closing TCP Port Serial port Selection of COM2 Selection of serial port values in combo box Baud rate Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate values in combo box Parity Selection of Even Parity IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 93
41. D No Siemens 3x EOR D No Sprecher 3x EOR D No IEC103 Basic PQI D No ABB PQI D No Areva PQI D No DB PQI D No IDS PQI D Yes Mauell PQI D No NRM PQI D Yes SAT PQI D No Siemens PQI D No Sprecher PQI D No IEC104 Basic REG D Yes Basic REG DP Yes Basic REG D REG DP Yes Basic EOR D Yes Basic CPR D No Basic REG DP EOR D No Basic 2x REG DP No Basic 3x REG D No Basic 8x REG D No 61850 REG D A Yes REG D A Standard Con figuration without GOOSE V4 3 REG D A Yes REG D A Standard Con figuration V4 3 With GOOSE REG D A Yes REG D A V4 3 With GOOSE File transfer COLDFIRE REG D A x2 Yes REG D A x2 without GOOSE V4 3 REG D A x3 Yes REG D A x3 without GOOSE V4 3 REG D A REG Yes REG D A REG DP A DP A without goose V4 3 1 6 REG D A REG Yes REG D A REG DP A DP A with GOOSE V4 3 1 6 REG D A x3 Yes REG D A x3 REG DP A REG DP A with GOOSE V4 3 16 REG D A Yes REG D A without GOOSE V4 0 WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 261 We take care of it Board Protocol SCADA Devices Template availability Note REG D A Yes REG D A without GOOSE V4 1 REG DP A Yes REG DP A without GOOSE V1 6 REG DP A x2 Yes REG DP A x2 without GOOSE V1 6 EOR D Yes EOR D without GOOSE V4 5 EOR D Yes EOR D with GOOSE V4 5 PQI D Yes PQI D without GOOSE V2 0 GDASYS Yes GDASYS without GOOSE V2 0 C37 118 Basic GDASys Yes MODBUS Basic REG
42. D Yes If the selected template is not available the following text appears in the window Template file isn t implemented for chosen combination protocol SCADA Eberle devices Page 262 WinConfig in Step by Step mode Other options available in the window Table 102 Settings of protocols and templates a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Protocol Selection of DNP3 Selection of transmission proto values in col combo box Template edition Selection of Edition 1 for Selection of templates for cho values in IEC61850 pro sen protocol combo box tocol or empty for other pro tocols SCADA template Selection of Protocol de Selection of templates for cho values in pendent sen protocol combo box Attached eberle Selection of Protocol de Option to select attached Eberle devices values in pendent devices disabled for IEC61850 combo box Transmission Selection of balanced IEC101 specific setting selec mode values in tion of balanced or unbalanced combo box mode Physical medium Selection of RS232 Option to select type of serial values in interface available for serial combo box protocols Idle state Selection of Non inverted Option to select inverted or values in non inverted mode in the case combo box when fiber optic serial interface is selected Open user Option box not selected Option enables selection of specific file existing XML or INI file with pre
43. DP Yes ABB REG D REG DP No Areva REG D REG DP No IDS REG D REG DP No SAT REG D REG DP No Siemens REG D REG DP No Sprecher REG D REG DP No IEC101 Basic 2x REG D 1x Yes REG DP ABB 2x REG D 1x No REG DP Areva 2x REG D 1x No REG DP IDS 2x REG D 1x No WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle A Board Protocol SCADA Devices Template Note availability REG DP SAT 2x REG D 1x No REG DP Siemens 2x REG D 1x No REG DP Sprecher 2x REG D 1x No REG DP IEC101 Basic 1x REG D 2x No REG DP ABB 1x REG D 2x No REG DP Areva 1x REG D 2x No REG DP IDS 1x REG D 2x No REG DP SAT 1x REG D 2x No REG DP Siemens 1x REG D 2x No REG DP Sprecher 1x REG D 2x No REG DP IEC101 Basic 2x REG D 2x Yes REG DP ABB 2x REG D 2x No REG DP Areva 2x REG D 2x No REG DP IDS 2x REG D 2x No REG DP SAT 2x REG D 2x No REG DP Siemens 2x REG D 2x No REG DP Sprecher 2x REG D 2x No REG DP IEC101 Basic 2x REG DP 1x Yes EOR D ABB 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D Areva 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D IDS 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D SAT 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 257 We take care of it Page 258 Board Protocol SCADA Devices Template Note av
44. Default Description Activate Yes No No Option to disable the channel Connection type Selection of RAW State of channel values in SOCKET Serial Direct Telnet combo box Shared with IEC OFF IP address 4x 0 to 255 IP address TCP port 0 to 65535 3003 TCP port Inactivity timeout S 180 Timeout after which the serial device is closed if data transfer does not occur By default is 0 It means that serial device is closed only by closing TCP Port Serial port Selection of COM2 Selection of serial port values in combo box Baud rate Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate values in combo box Parity Selection of Even Parity values in combo box Stop bits Selection of 1 Stop bits values in combo box Data bits Selection of 8 Data bits values in combo box XON XOFF Selection of No Option to select XON XOFF values in handshaking combo box RTS CTS Selection of No Option to select RTS CTS hand values in shaking combo box RTS CTS inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RTS CTS signals combo box Rxd TxD inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RxD TxD signals combo box Interface type Selection of RS232 Option to select type of inter values in face combo box Max message 0 to 65535 0 Max message length length Tx blocking time ms 0 to 65535 0 Tx blocking time IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 91 We take care of it Page 92 IEC103 settings REG PE
45. Eee SSS SSS _ eee Figure 85 MODBUS indications Table 64 MODBUS indications Setting Format Range Default Description Function 0 to 999 0 Function number Address 0 to 65535 0 Address Class 0 to 65535 0 Class Device offset 0 to 999 0 Indication device offset Dev type 0 to 999 0 Indication device type Deviation float 0 Absolute deviation value Scale float 0 Scale value Max value float 0 to 65535 0 Max value Description text 50 chars empty User description Modbus settings Page 157 We take care of it Page 158 18 5 3 Commands Table of settings of individual commands represents command settings This table is com mon for all a eberle devices connected to the telecontrol board The upper line contains execution buttons for work with the individual command lines and for export import of the entire table of commands Selected line in the table is marked by yellow background All changes have to be confirmed by using the Confirm button Commands Columns to hide Function Address Type Scale Command Description confirm 1 geg Ia JI meet JI Gees JI een JI ween Il Rows count 5 Count of selected rows 0 o Function Address a Type Scale Command Description 4 i v i u v SEE i O Write Single
46. Ethernet interface Ethernet interface of PC with running WinConfig has the same IP address as connected telecontrol board Ethernet interface Work with protocol settings Page 33 We take care of it Page 34 9 2 8 T ransfer settings from PC function To transfer selected settings please click the WE icon that can be found in the main menu The following Data transfer form now appears on the right side of the settings tree Transfer settings from PC Transfer settings and firmware from PC to telecontrol board Line type Ethernet Transfer mode Manual transfer CH Remote transfer Operation Status Activity Detect on LAN Figure 7 Remote transfer from PC REG P Available controls m Transfer settings and firmware from PC to telecontrol board Line type selection of way of data transfer Ethernet or serial via a eberle device Transfer Mode Manual transfer or Remote transfer selection of the way of data transfer Detect on LAN function of automatic detection of telecontrol boards with CSO or COM SERVER firmware connected to LAN List of detected boards can be seen in the above placed table after successful detection Remote transfer from PC execution button for activating remote transfer function Transfer settings from PC Line type Serial via Eberle device Serial port number 1 Operation Progress 0 Status Activity Put the device in loade
47. Firmware transfer from PC Transfer of application program and settings 9 2 10 Transfer settings to PC function To transfer settings from telecontrol board to PC settings click the Si icon in the main menu Transfer form appears in the right side of the settings tree Page 38 Work with protocol settings a eberle Za Transfer settings to PC Transfer settings from telecontrol board to PC L Board type REG PE D Line type Ethernet HTTPS access User name Use last login values Forget login vslues Transmission protocol Transmission protocol is set to HTTPS Set HTTPS Set HTTP HTTPS protocol is recommended for improved security of data transfers Firmware type Version of j Device IP PRP Card type nn ttings dat Name of settings Kees MAC address ti REG PE 10 5 5 u S ES a TK860 DNP3 20140120 DNP3_REGD_BASIC 10 1 10 195 jeoneasenARnZ Operstion en De Status Finished Activity Completed detecting devices Detect on LAN Steps to transfer settings 1 Detect board on LAN Remote transfer to PC 2 Select board in the table 3 Remote transfer to PC Compare with selected settings Change board IP settings Submit certificates Figure 10 Transfer settings to PC Work with protocol settings Page 39 We take care of it All user actions are similar as those for Transfer settings from PC function The Compare with selected settings button runs the fun
48. GUI and libraries developed in C NET software development environment for commu nication with telecontrol boards file services and additional auxiliary functions WinConfig prepares settings for REG P REG PE REG PED with IEC101 IEC103 IEC104 DNP3 and Modbus protocols and COM Server on a local host local web server and stores them in a standard file format XML file The settings file can then be transferred via Glossary 6 1 1 a eberle HTTPS to board flash memory in the case of REG PE REG PED board types WinConfig cre ates binary data files in Intel HEX format and transfers them into the board memory in the case of REG P boards Serial transfer via a eberle device or Ethernet transfer can be used according to the REG P type Firmware is always transferred together with settings Win Config use the latest firmware which is part of its package A part of configuration software is also transferred to the telecontrol board and this online part provides a system functions focused to the management of telecontrol board system software user management etc with high level of security The functionality of this part of WinConfig is described in a separate chapter WinConfig splits into two main parts the local web server and the local Web site with ap plication libraries Settings may be prepared stored and retrieved for various configurations without a direct link to the device Settings are saved in xml file types WinC
49. General options checkbox unchecked Time Synchronization SNTP and Time Synchroniza Device tion General options checkbox unchecked Process Image Process Image General options checkbox unchecked Commands Execution Commands Exe cution Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Verbose output Verbose output Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Link layer log Link Layer Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Link State machine log Link State ma chine Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Application layer log Application Layer IEC protocol checkbox unchecked Verbose output Verbose output IEC protocol Link checkbox unchecked Link layer log Layer IEC protocol Link checkbox unchecked Link State machine log State machine IEC protocol checkbox unchecked Application layer log Application Layer COM Server checkbox checked Protocol debug option activa Trace Activate tion trace Level Selection of user Option to select lever of super values in visory messages user combo box developer Trace via PARAM radio button checked Logging to PARAM Connector Connector IEC104 settings a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Trace via TCP Port radio button unchecked Logging to TCP port TCP port 1 to 65535 5010 TCP port Logging with checkbox checked Logging with Timestamp Timestamp Mirroring Acti checkbox checked Activation vate TCP port
50. IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 97 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description TCP port 1to 65535 5010 TCP port Logging with checkbox checked Logging with Timestamp Timestamp Mirroring Acti checkbox checked Activation vate TCP port 1 to 65535 5011 TCP port 12 4 Devices 12 4 1 Time synchronization PQI D Time synchronization Strategy of device time synchronization all onty attached device O only the following list UTC character 176 List of synchronized devices JUDU Figure 46 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings PQI D Table 26 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings PQI D Setting Format Range Default Description Strategy of device Selection of all Strategy of device time synchroni time synchronization checkboxes zation UTC character Oto 255 176 UTC character List of synchronized 3characters List of synchronized devices if only devices of device ID the following list option is used Page 98 IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 4 2 a eberle A Time synchronization EOR D Time synchronization Strategy of device time synchronization all only attached device only the following list UTC character 176 List of synchronized devices II ES as gees Figure 47 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings EOR D Table 27 IEC103 Devices Ti
51. Kommunikations Fehler COM3 communication error 16 LAN Kommunikations Fehler LAN communication error 20 LAN L Fehler LAN L error 21 LAN R Fehler LAN R error 22 LON Fehler LON error 28 Batterie fast verbraucht Low battery IEC101 settings a eberle A 11 Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P IEC103 settings for REG P telecontrol boards TK509 TK517 and TK400 are different from settings for REG PE D telecontrol boards TK860 TK885 This chapter describes IEC103 settings for REG P in the WinConfig pages where these settings are different from IEC101 See chapter 11 for description of IEC103 for REG PE D telecontrol boards 11 1 Advanced 11 1 1 Settings SCADA Settings SCADA tree branch contains IEC103 specific settings IEC103 Interface settings IEC receiver inverted IEC transmitter inverted IEC RTS signal inverted IEC CTS signal inverted IEC RS485 activated IEC fiber optics activated IEC RS232 used Baud rate of serial port IEC Bd 19200 i ON time of serial LEDs 10ms 1 RTSICTS Activate serial RTS CTS Dont activate serial RTS CTS eOODDDD Protocol settings Link address of REG P 1 ASDU address 1 Inter character timeout ms 4 Timeout after interchar ms 10 function type 0 IEC address of error multipoint information number 0 Compatibility byte 2v Identification string EBE
52. LEDs Link address of 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG P REG PE D Link address of 0 to 65535 1 Link address of DNP master DNP3 master Inter character ms 2 to 1000 4 Timeout between two charac timeout ters in telegram Time till reset ms 1to 65535 1000 Time until reset after cold re start RS485 activated option box Not selected RS485 activated Number of TSDU 1to 128 1 Number of TSDU fragments fragments Size of each TSDU 64 2048 2048 Size of each TSDU fragment fragment Using confirma option box selected Using confirmation for EVENT tion for EVENT response response Timeout for re ms 1 to 65535 800 Timeout for receiving AL con ceiving AL firmation confirmation Number of repeti 0 to 255 1 Number repetitions after AL tions after AL confirm timeout confirm timeout Timeout se ms 1 to 65535 5000 Timeout select operate func lect operate tion function DNP3 settings REG PE D Page 141 We take care of it Page 142 15 3 15 3 1 Device X Device request settings Device request settings tree branch contains device specific settings Device Request Settings Identifier of device AA Poll string RPS3 Size of answer byte 244 Offset of seconds field byte 18 Offset of msec field byte 22 Description Figure 74 DNP3 device request settings REG PE D Table 53 DNP3 device settings REG PE D Setting Format Rang
53. REG PE D telecontrol boarde 40 Submit certificates for REG PE D telecontrol boards ccccccccesseceesssceeecsssceeecssseeeeesseaeees 41 ele el 43 PRP Parallel Redundancy Drotocol nisinsin nerad asrine arei aeaa isai 43 Comparessettingsifunction asien 44 Rules for export import using Microsoft Excel 45 EXDOrttTO NS EE 45 Imp rtsfrom EXCel an een 45 Migration Of settings asrorini resisa Eeer 46 Checking of entered values url 46 IEC101 RT d 47 eE EE E E E A A E S E E 47 Advance BE 49 IEC101 Settings SCADA for REG P telecontrol boarde 49 IEC101 Settings SCADA for REG PE D telecontrol boarde 53 C mserver e d TC 55 ComServer settings IEC101 for REG PE D ccccccccsssscceesssseceessseeeeeseseececseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeaeees 56 Supervisory settings IEC101 for REG PED 56 linked devices ea en ke 56 Time synchronization uinseeeaienseniah ea nn 57 Internal COMMUNICATION yo anstehen are iaa ATA EE aaeeea 58 LConverter Eff rsz 2 ee EA AEE A aAA aaa 59 E o EE 60 Device FEQUEST Setting Sesriem nen 60 lee 62 Commands E 65 Editing the 10A IM columNsaass n8r rer Elise 67 Status ae ae ie ee elek eines 68 Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P sccsscccsssssssssseseccccssenssssseseesecssanecsseeseeesessanenss 71 te Ee DE 71 El Te RE 71 Ne 73 Converter ENOS ossis arstin ar andreas entsandt RSR resets snes 73 DEVICE a eure elek 73 Device request settings lange een ine nie lan 73 IEC103 settin
54. RII is not processed in REG PE D and returned to control center according to IEC 60870 5 103 7 2 6 Scan number SCN It isis use as return identifier in general interrogation responses Supplementary information SIN It can be can be used as follows By general interrogation as a number of GI request By positive or negative acknowledgement of command as RII IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 77 We take care of it 12 1 15 Status of fault SOF SOF indicates whether the EOR D has tripped during the fault bit one whether the dis turbance data are currently being transmitted bit two 2 Bit 3 Test equals O and defines disturbance data recorded during normal operation 12 1 16 Tag position TAP It set to O as constant 12 1 17 Type of order TOO REG PE D supports the following types lt 1 gt selection of fault lt 2 gt request for disturbance data lt 3 gt abortion of disturbance data lt 8 gt request for channel lt 9 gt abortion of channel lt 16 gt request for tags lt 17 gt abortion of tags lt 24 gt request for list of recorded disturbances lt 32 gt end of disturbance data transmission without abortion lt 33 gt end of disturbance data transmission with abortion by control system lt 34 gt end of disturbance data transmission with abortion by the protection equip ment lt 35 gt end of channel trans
55. Serial booter is waiting for connection LED s status of REG P Indication version TK517 board 5 Normal operation 1 Indication of transmit receive and error in communication be tween REG P and external device using the topical protocol 2 Indication of transmit receive and error in internal communica tion between REG P and a eberle device 3 Indication of power supply voltage and running watchdog All LEDs blinking invalid combination of firmware and settings Parallel booter operation Parallel booter for data transfer via parallel Param port is running This way of data transfer is not supported by WinConfig Page 274 Tips on Troubleshooting Serial booter operation data transfer 23 Related Documentation Document REG PE Firmware Update IEC61850 v1 2 doc REG PE Quick Guide for technicians IEC61850 1 2 doc REG PE User Management IEC61850 v1 4 doc Installation instructions COM Server functionality of PQI DA doc PQI DA_loader_mode MOV Related Documentation a eberle Author a Eberle a Eberle a Eberle a Eberle a Eberle A Serial booter is running Alternate blinking of some LEDs indicates Page 275 We take care of it Page 276 24 Maintenance Cleaning This unit is maintenance free for customers A DANGER Danger of electric shock W Do not open the unit W Maintenance of the equipment can only be carried out by A Eberle 25
56. Timeout for reception of first ception of first char char Inter character ms 1to 65535 150 Inter character timeout timeout TX blocking ms Oto 255 50 TX blocking C37 118 Settings Page 169 We take care of it Page 170 19 3 3 Device x Device x page sets device related parameters of internal communication Device Request Settings Identifier of device AA Data class 12 Class type interval Ww Cycle time of poll ms 2000 Length of response 142 Number of data buffers 1 Full buffer policy Drop older data v Offset of value in REG response Comment 5sec interval quantities Data d Figure 95 C37 118 Device x Table 74 C37 118 Device Request Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Identifier of de AA Read only Identifier of device vice Data class 1to 255 As defined in Device data class template Class type Selection of As defined in Class type values in template combo box Cycle time of poll ms 1 to 65535 2000 Cycle time of poll Length of re 1 to 65535 142 Length of response sponse Data buffers 1 to 255 As defined in Data buffers template Offset of priority 1 to 65535 Offset of priority value in REG value in REG re response sponse Comment string 50 charac As defined in User comment ters template C37 118 Settings a eberle A 19 3 4 Indications Indications page sets parameters o
57. Trace via TCP Port radio button unchecked Logging to TCP port TCP port 1 to 65535 10888 TCP port Logging with checkbox checked Logging with Timestamp Timestamp Mirroring Acti checkbox checked Mirror port Activate vate trace TCP port 1 to 65535 23456 TCP port C37 118 Settings a eberle A 19 3 Linked Devices Linked Devices page allows user to define virtual devices from the point of view of the RegSys internal communication Device Enabled Identifier of device Poll type 1 AA RPS 2 AA RPS 3 AR RPS 4 AA RPS 5s pk RPS 6 ila RPS 7 OD s RPS 8 EI Aa RPS Figure 92 C37 118 Linked Devices Table 71 C37 118 Linked Devices Setting Format Range Default Description Device Read only order number of device from the point of view of RegSys communication Enabled checkbox Checked unchecked Option whether the corre sponding device is enabled Identifier of text checkbox AA Identifier of the device in device RegSys communication Poll type RPS Read only Poll type C37 118 Settings Page 167 We take care of it 19 3 1 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization page sets time synchronization options NTP specific NTP primary server IP address 0 0 0 0 NTP secondary server IP address 0 0 0 0 Rese Figure 93 C37 118 Time Synchronizati
58. application allows flexible to set properties of external Input Objects partial data ob jects from a published GOOSE The GOOSE lightExternal Input Objects pane contains the information about the subscribed objects and commands which will be executed after any changing of object s value GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration E fel oim a o o 8 Idx 0 gcbST Ag Num 8 GGIO 2 Ind4 q Figure 152 List of GOOSE lightexternal Input Objects Page 225 We take care of it Page 226 Input Object Configuration Double click on an item Object Configuration in the left hand menu The GOOSE ightInput Object Configuration pane contains settings of one object and allows to adjust it s for a particular structure of GOOSE telegrams Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Log GOOSE Control Blocks Object Editors General settings for GOOSE AW GOOSEJight Input Object Configuration GE GoCb_RegATCC Input Activate V GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration ERBE I ibe 0 gcbST AG Num 3 GGIO 2 Ind2 stVal 4 Num 4 GGIO 2 ind2 q AAG Num 5 GGIO 2 Ind3 stVal 9 Num 6 GGIO 2 Ind3 q Num 7 GGIO 2 Ind4 stVal Ag Num 8 GGIO 2 Ind4 q Figure 153 External GOOSE lightobject configuration Table 89 External GOOSE lightobject settings Name Unit Range Standard Description value Order No
59. asks for counterparty IP The ICMP echo request packet is used The user network interface is determined by routing table 2 Ping ARP e The ARP ping is determined for the diagnostic of network connection within one subnet The system asks for counterparty IP and if there is more network interfaces TK885 it asks also for the interface to be used This ping usually passes through firewall The ARP protocol is not routed to other networks 3 Show routing table e Shows current routing table 4 Show interfaces e Shows current list of network interfaces with parameters IP address mask MAC address and statistics of sent and received data 5 Show saved network parameters IP addresses bonding e Shows network parameters IP address mask gateway state of bonding saved in the flash memory These parameters will be used after board restart 6 Set network parameters IP addresses bonding e Setting of network parameters IP address mask gateway state of bonding solved as a series of questions and answers 7 Back e Goto main menu Services menu 1 Services state e Shows the state of SSH SFTP and HTTPS services enabled or disabled 2 Enable SSH SFTP e Enables SSH SFTP service The change takes effect after board restart 3 Disable SSH SFTP e Disables SSH SFTP service The change takes effect after board restart 4 Enable WinConfig https network detect e Enables services necessary for the communication with
60. by user login and password remoteuser login can be used with remoteuser password The access is driven by sequence of user menu that allow user to show and or change the board settings of to show logs of kernel system and applications 6 3 5 Menu and meaning of individual items Main menu 1 Network menu e Goto menu for network setting and diagnostic 2 Services menu e Go to menu administration of network services SSH SFTP HTTPS 3 Log menu e Goto menu showing logs 4 Change terminal password e Change of SSH and SFTP passwords Change is applied to the currently logged user Program asks for entering of old password and two times new password Attention a change is applied immediately 5 HTTPS users management e Goto administration of HTTPS users off line WinConfig 6 Logout e Terminal logout 7 Reboot e Restart telecontrol board 8 Recovery menu e Goto recovery mode This menu item is shown only in the case of access via local serial port Another condition is that the board has to be prepared for the recovery mode the R key is pressed in the moment or recovery notification during the card restart 9 Start root shell e The root shell is determined only for administrators and is not available for remoteuser and localuser Page 22 WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED a eberle A Network menu 1 Ping ICMP e The ICMP ping is determined for the diagnostic of network connection The system
61. combo box IP address 4x 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 IP address TCP port 1 to 65535 1023 CS TCP port Inactivity timeout s 1 to 65535 60 Inactivity timeout Serial port COM3 Read only CS serial port defined in Serial Ports Assignment page Baud rate of serial Selection of 115200 Baud rate of serial port port values in combo box Parity NONE Read only Parity Stop bits 1 Read only Stop bits Data bits 8 Read only Data bits XON XOFF Selection of Yes XON XOFF handshaking values in combo box RTS CTS Selection of No RTS CTS handshaking values in combo box Interface type RS232 Read only interface type Max message length 0 to 65535 0 Max message length Tx blocking time ms 0 to 65535 0 Tx blocking time C37 118 Settings a eberle A C37 118 Settings Page 163 We take care of it 19 2 4 Supervisory Supervisory settings allow user to define logging options to see log of C37 118 conversion operation Traoe options Logging Type Level Deactivate VW Traoe Output Trace via PARAM connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended Eberle Device Link Layer Fi Application Layer U C37 118 Protocol Link Layer go Application Layer DCF77 Trace Activate trace Lo TOP port COM Server Trace Activate trace OD Le Trace vis PARAM Connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck
62. dec Up to 1 It defines selected number and used to quick input num 300 select a data object ber to select Description GOOSE ID and text Drop 0 The parameter defines a subscriber which con DataSet down tains this data object list with 16 sub scribers 1EC61850 Standard value a eberle Za Description Order number dec FromO 0 The parameter defines an order number of the in Dataset up to data object in data set 300 For more information see IEC61850 Standards EIEC 61850 GOOSE AppID 101 PDU Length 232 Reservedl 0x0000 Reserved2 0x0000 e IEC GOOSE control Block Reference REGDAA LLNO GO Gocb_Bin Time Allowed to Live msec 8000 DatasetReference REGDAA LLNO GODs_Bin GOOSEID GoId_Bin Event Timestamp 1984 01 01 00 00 40 264004 Timequality Statenumber 1 Sequencenumber sequence Number 827 Test FALSE config Revision 1 Needs Commissioning FALSE Number Dataset Entries 32 eeneg 010000 0 0 6 BOOLEAN FALSE BITSTRING BITS 0000 0087 0100000000000 BITS 0000 0015 0100000000000 BOOLEAN FALSE BITSTRING BITS 0000 0015 0100000000000 BOOLEAN FALSE Input acti string checked The parameter defines the use of the object vate Parameter allows not delete set object from settings file although it will be not used in firm ware Command check checked The parameter defines kind of handling of object execution box in data set If not che
63. eg EE 81 IEC103 Settings SCADA for PQI D device 0 0 cccecccccccesssssseceeeeesesseaeaeeeeecessesnnaeaeeeeseessesenaeess 81 IEC103 Settings SCADA for EOR D device ussessssenesssnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 85 Ethernet COM Servar u raue ROEDER ANE 87 Comserver settings POL D EO 00 eege een ec A het 89 Comserver settings EOR D is ics ccsca aes cstce aaa Ehe EEN Eeer 93 Supervis ry settings a8 ana a E aa 95 EE 98 Time synchronization POL D aeeie aeai daanin iaa 98 Time synchronization EOR D 99 Internal communication PQI D 220ur44400rsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnonnnnonnnnnnnnnn nenne nnnnnnnnenn 100 Internal communication EOR D uueeeeseeeeenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenenennnnnenennnenensnnnensnsnenenensnennnenn 102 DEVICE E 104 Device settings EE 104 Data points indications POLD 107 Table of Contents Page 5 We take care of it 12 5 3 12 5 4 12 5 5 12 5 6 12 5 7 13 13 1 13 2 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 2 3 13 3 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 3 4 14 14 1 14 2 14 2 1 14 3 14 3 1 14 3 2 14 3 3 15 15 1 15 2 15 2 1 15 3 15 3 1 15 3 2 15 3 3 16 17 17 1 17 2 Page 6 indications EOR D DEE 109 Command S s isna e E E a E E e a E E 110 Fault ECONA EE 111 EOR D defined settings u in RE SONNEN ENAK Eike 114 Single disturbance value SDV 114 IEC104 KT d 115 eE EE E A E E E A A E N N E 115 te COC WEE 118 Settings SCADA u un 118 ComsServer
64. el input Tap Position Error 1 Tap Position Er D Emer sd Binary input el input Co ManvarAuto 7 Auto Binary input sl input i i lt Gar SE 1 2 with status E Ile frz win status W 1 Parallel ma input 7 2 with status Bit El md Local Remote Loca Remote 7 Bengel Remote ECH l input Figure 71 DNP3 indications REG P Table 50 DNP3 indications REG P lt lt lt lt lt lt lt E AE oO Setting Format Range Default Description DNP3 object type selection of values Binary input DNP object type in combo box REG data type selection of values Bit REG data type in combo box DNP3 obj index 0 to 65535 0 DNP object index Static definitions selection of values no class O Static definitions in combo box point Event definitions selection of values no event Event definitions in combo box Event class selection of values 1 Event class in combo box Abs deviation 0 to 65535 0 Absolute deviation Scale float Scale RPS offset O to 255 RPS offset RPS bit selection of values RPS bit in combo box Description text 50 characters empty User description DNP3 settings REG P 15 15 1 Basic DNP3 settings REG PE D Basic Settings description DNP3_REGD_BASIC Line type Baud rate of serial port DNP3 Bd Link address of REG PE D
65. firmware installed Ethernet HTTPS transfer available for TK8xx telecontrol boards Direct access to board memory if running WinConfig directly in the TK8xx board Work with protocol settings a eberle A Transfer communication protocol settings from PC Transfer from PC to telecontrol board can be performed in the following ways depending upon the types of telecontrol board and application program Transfer via a serial connection of a eberle device for telecontrol board types TK517 TK509 and TK400 via Manual transfer from PC button User has to enter COM port number of connected PC and manually set the a eberle device and telecontrol board to the serial down upload state before transfer can begins Transfer via local Ethernet connection for TK400 board type by Manual transfer from PC button Telecontrol board has to be manually reset by reset button on TK400 board to run Ethernet booter so this way of data transfer is usable only if user has access to the a eberle device rack WinConfig performs automatic detection of manual reset event of telecontrol board and automatically chooses free IP address within the given subnet for connection with the Ethernet booter IP settings for TCP connection with Ethernet booter are used only for the current TCP session In the case of manual Ethernet trans fer the WinConfig function has to be started first and then the TK400 board has to be reset so that the WinConfig program can detect
66. folder lt Logging state off gt log httpserver log lt Logging gt To switch the logging on change the Logging state option to on The option al lows also setting of the log file name and folder In the above stated example the log file name is httpserver log and will be created in the log subfolder of the Win Config installation folder WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED Page 15 We take care of it Page 16 WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED a eberle A 6 2 REG PEX Loader software The REG PEX loader RPL is software tool for transfer of Linux Kernel and RAM disk into the REG PE D and PQI DA telecontrol boards equipped only with U Boot software Such boards cannot cooperate directly with WinConfig The RPL also allows change of board IP settings and selection of kernel with without the bonding feature The RPL is low level software tool and should be used by advanced users only The RPL software is contained in the WinConfig installation package and can be launched from Transfer from PC page by the Run RPL button The WinConfig also offers launch of RPL in the case when no REG PE D telecontrol board is detected REG PEX Loader V3 2 2 Firmware update Settings update Terminal PED and PQI DA REG PE i REG PE connected Netmask first port REG PED with two ports Gateway address REG PED per first Ethernet connected Settings only for REG PED REG PED per second Ethernet connected PQI DA P
67. gt lt EnumVal ord 0 gt unknown lt EnumVal gt lt EnumVal ord 1 gt forward lt EnumVal gt lt EnumVal ord 2 gt backward lt EnumVal gt lt EnumVal ord 3 gt both lt EnumVal gt lt EnumType gt Device internal type is inapplicable because this status is not mapped in internal data and is not arranged in the poll string 1EC61850 20 6 2 IEC61850 a eberle First Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 Forw defines internal SPS data event offset 19 bit offset 0 Its behavior fits with Dir enumeration type in IEC61850 If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 1 will be set Value FALSE ignored Second Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 Back defines internal SPS data event off set 19 bit offset 1 Its behavior fits with Dir enumeration type in IEC61850 If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 2 will be set Value FALSE ignored Third Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 2 Both defines internal SPS data event offset 19 bit offset 2 Its behavior fits with Dir enumeration type in IEC61850 If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 3 will be set Value FALSE ignored Example Triggered status object Extended syntax setting is SEvn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 Set SEvn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 Clear IEC61850 type is BOOLEAN Device internal type is inapplicable because this status is not mapped in internal data and is not arranged in the poll string First Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 Set defines internal SPS da
68. gt lt P type MAC Address xsi type tP_MAC Address gt 01 0C CD 01 01 01 lt P gt lt P type APPID gt 1 lt P gt lt P type VLAN PRIORITY gt 4 lt P gt lt P type VLAN ID gt 000 lt P gt lt Address gt lt MinTime unit s multiplier m gt 10 lt MinTime gt lt MaxTime unit s multiplier m gt 1000 lt MaxTime gt lt Address gt lt P type MAC Address xsi type tP_MAC Address gt 01 0C CD 01 01 0A lt P gt lt P type APPID gt 1 lt P gt lt P type VLAN PRIORITY gt 4 lt P gt lt P type VLAN ID gt 000 lt P gt lt Address gt lt MinTime unit s multiplier m gt 10 lt MinTime gt lt MaxTime unit s multiplier m gt 1000 lt MaxTime gt lt PhysConn type Plug gt lt P type Type gt FOC lt P gt lt P type Plug gt ST lt P gt lt PhysConn gt lt ConnectedAP gt lt SubNetwork gt lt Communication gt Figure 144 GOOSE light Control Blocks Configuration In this case application transmits data from GoDsUI dataset in Goose Output telegrams The content of a GOOSE light message is defined with a dataset The GOOSE light message is sent as multicast messages over the communication network IEC61850 Page 215 We take care of it Page 216 One example of SCL configuration shown below lt ConnectedAP iedName REGD159 apName P1 gt lt GSE IdInst REGD1 cbName GoCbUl_REGD1 gt lt Address gt lt P type MAC Address xsi type tP_MAC Address gt 01 0C CD 01 00 00 lt P gt
69. is user editable Status bits are available for P1 poll type only Page 68 IEC101 settings a eberle A ID Comment Selbsttest Fehler IOA IOA mio SebpstestFener 19 Jm e ROMFehler 0 Rowen nu o 5 ee RAMFehler 0 3 EEPROM A Fehler 4 EEPROM B Fehler oe o bo oe le be bo e le be bo s Anwender Fehler A op KW COo C 7 ImtemerBatenerene _ _ _ k E e E e In Jm Ib e e e e e We be be h 0 Uv Ausfall e p b b C Cid 12 13 COM1 Kommunikations Fehler o In o bo e MM e We bb bb h 4 ESCH Kommunikations Fehler 15 COM3 Kommunikations Fehler 16 LAN Kommunikations Fehler 17 e p Io b e W boe hbe e le be bo e le be bb BI ge e e be TK KW e m rme io fo fe CHE no Iesel m e munpom rn e un Figure 33 Status bits IEC101 settings Page 69 We take care of it Page 70 Table 16 Meaning of Status bits ID German text English translation 0 Selbsttest Fehler Autotest error 1 ROM Fehler ROM error 2 RAM Fehler RAM error 3 EEPROM A Fehler EEPROM A error 4 EEPROM B Fehler EEPROM AB error 5 Anwender Fehler A User error A 7 InternerBatterie Fehler Internal battery error 10 UV Ausfall UV outage 13 COM1 Kommunikations Fehler COM1 communication error 14 COM2 Kommunikations Fehler COM2 communication error 15 COM3
70. l I ar Figure 29 IEC101 Commands Table 13 IEC101 Commands Setting Format Range Default Description IOA IOA O to 16777215 0 Information object address hi mi lo or identification of information in IEC telegram 3x 0 to 255 Control code selection of val T145 Information object type control ues in combo box code Command string text 50 chars empty Command string Scale exponent selection of val 0 Scale exponent ues in combo box 100 value decimal Oto 65535 0 100 value available for T148 only Description text 48 chars empty User description IEC101 settings Page 65 We take care of it Page 66 Columns to hide Information object address IOA IOA hi millo Control code Command string Scale exponent 100 value Description Confirm Reset Add Insert Delete Export Import Rows count 21 Count of selected rows 0 w o s200 lo da d Una sl RegauTo o w o Hand Aut o e193 pp 1132 1 ne v aa q20 fregup 1 else regdowi ov 0 H nertie E e194 pp da la 745 v Regswi 1 jov 0 sonwert o s195 pp Jas la mas v Regswi2 ES 0 aawer o s196 jo 32 lila mag v Regswi 3 jov 0 Sollwert3 P Wan Cp H al 17 1 iis Figure 30 IEC101 Commands Table 14 IEC101 Commands Setting Format Range Default Description IOA IOA O to 16777215 0 Information object a
71. light Subscriber Number if acti vated The parameter defines any auxiliary flag for future using It is not applicable now Pre Conditions Checked data Point Type Defines a checked Data Point type in Poll string Poll String Offset Defines a checked Data Point Poll string offset Checked Value optional Defines a checked value as FLOAT32 value Minimal Position optional Defines minimal position by Limit condition Maximal Position optional Defines maximal position by Limit condition Allowed Command Value to leave minimal Position Defines command value that permitted at minimal position by Limit condition Allowed Command Value to leave maximal Position Defines command value that permitted at maximal position by Limit condition 1EC61850 a eberle Za 20 7 GOOSE light Settings 20 7 1 IEC GOOSE light Architecture The implementation of the IEC 61850 GOOSE services provides a mechanism for sending and receiving the standardized GOOSE telegrams The settings and architectures are quite similar for publisher and subscribers It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the GOOSE light architecture 20 7 2 GOOSE light Control Blocks Settings lt P type 0SI PSEL gt 00000001 lt P gt lt P type 05I SSEL gt 0001 lt P gt lt P type 0SI TSEL gt 0001 lt P gt lt Address gt lt GSE 1dInst A cbName GoCb Bin gt lt Address
72. lt P type APPID gt OBB8 lt P gt lt P type VLAN PRIORITY gt 4 lt P gt lt P type VLAN ID gt 000 lt P gt lt Address gt lt MinTime unit s multiplier m gt 10 lt MinTime gt lt MaxTime unit s multiplier m gt 1000 lt MaxTime gt lt GSE gt lt ConnectedAP gt The captured fragment of the GOOSE light output telegram illustrated below DIN 5850 Poo Cer 221 Reservedl 0x0000 Reserved2 0x0000 D PDU IEC GOOSE control Block Reference REGDAA LLNO GO GoOCb_State tem TE 8 j a SECT DatasetReference REGDAA LLNO GODS_State GOOSEID GoId_state ver z amp dad J J UU UU d SUUS GOU UT 5 yi 00 Statenumber 1 Sequencenumber sequence Number 429 Test FALSE config Revision 1 Number Dataset Entries 27 Figure 145 Capture fragment of GOOSE light telegram 1EC61850 a eberle A 20 7 3 GOOSE light Input Streams Inner Subscribers The application allows the configuration of up to 15 GOOSE light input streams The architecture of GOOSE light subscribing is shown in Fehler Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden Index 14 Subscribed input Subscribed input Subscribed input stream Index 0 stream Index 1 stream Index 14 Figure 146 GOOSE light Input architecture Each subscriber holds one set of objects in sequence order Each object of the subscribed set is given a particular number in received GOOSE light telegram If the subscriber has not been configured in
73. mask Has the subnet mask been correctly set The subnet mask results from the addressing scheme used in the network segment Remote access not possible Has the gateway address been correctly set in the device If it is not correct it will not be possible to access a device via two or more networks No time synchroni zation via NTP Is there at least one timeserver in the network and what is its ad dress Has the timeserver s address been correctly set in the NTP setting of REG PE REG PED device Is the device correctly parameterized for use of time synchroniza tion via Ethernet If the timeserver is a PC are the Windows time service deactivated and the correct NTP service started You can t save a data to jffs2 tar Do you have permission to store the file or does the path of your file contain illegal characters You can t restore a Do you have permission to the working file and directory Tips on Troubleshooting Page 271 We take care of it data from jffs2 tar 22 2 Diagnostic Functions in the Context of the REG P REG PE REG PED Device The subject of this section is troubleshooting problems with the settings of REG PE REG PED device and XXXSys Device interconnection Table 108 Diagnostic functions in the context of the device LED s status of REG PE Indication REG PED device A Normal operation 1 Indication of Ethernet activity depends on curre
74. of available Baud rates Slave address and identifier if device devices Basic settings also contain use definable description name of the entire settings Settings description Template for REG D MODBUS Line type serial v Baud rate of serial port MODBUS Bd 19200 W Slave Address Unit ID 2 RS485 activated Device Identifier of device 1 AA Confirm Reset Figure 80 MODBUS RTU basic settings Table 59 MODBUS basic settings Setting Format Range Default Description Settings de Text 50 characters Filename of Short user description of scription open settings settings file or name of set tings file Slave address 1 247 2 Address of slave RS485 acti Bd Checkbox unchecked If unchecked then RS232 or vated fiber optic mode is selected Identifier of text AA or A 1 to 9 defaults defined Device identifier string as device to Z 1 to 4 in the Devices appears in the device proto tree branch col Modbus settings Page 151 We take care of it 18 2 Basic settings MODBUS TCP Basic settings tree branch form contains common settings of MODBUS TCP protocol selec tion of Unit ID and identifier if device devices Basic settings also contain user definable description name ofthe entire settings Settings description Template for REG D MODBUS Line type Ethernet TCP W
75. off line WinConfig The WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED Page 23 We take care of it change takes effect after board restart 5 Disable WinConfig https network detect e Disables services necessary for the communication with off line WinConfig The change takes effect after board restart 6 Enable WinConfig WWW pages e Enables WinConfig WWW pages 7 Disable WinConfig WWW pages e Disables WinConfig WWW pages 8 Back e Gotomain menu Attention when both SSH SFTP and HTTPS accesses are disabled it is not possible to con nect the board remotely The local access via PARAM port only is possible in such case Log menu 1 Application and system log e Shows log with messages from system and from user applications 2 Kernel log e Shows log with messages from system kernel 3 Back e Goto main menu HTTPS users management menu 1 List users e Shows list of user accounts for HTTPS service users of off line WinConfig 2 Change user password e Changes user password The service asks for old password and two time for the new password The change takes effect after board restart 3 Add new user e Adds anew user account The service asks for new account name and two times password The change takes effect after board restart 4 Delete user e Deletes existing user account The service asks for existing user account name Page 24 WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED a eberle A The change ta
76. port device serial values in port combo box Parity Selection of EVEN Parity values in combo box ON time of ms 1 to 65535 10 ON time of serial LEDs serial LEDs Cycle time ms 0 to 65535 300 The parameter determines the cycle time of poll of the substation call If you set the para meter to zero the call is executed as soon as possible Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 300 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Wait time ms 0 to 65535 800 This parameter specifies how long the pro for ACK or gram waits for sequenced next frame data next se gt 2000 Bytes or the acknowledgement for quence command The wait time is dependent on frame the baud rate and the maximum message length Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 800 Cycle time ms O to 65535 1400 Cycle time of device status check if con of device nection with device fault status check Number of 1to 255 2 Max count of synchronization requests if repeats for serial communication with regulator fails SYNC cycle Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is 3 Number of Oto 255 1 Max number of the device s polling The poll repeats setting is not used to the commands Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is 1 Round time Check box NOT If value equals 0 time stamps are rounded do
77. settings nike 120 Supervisory Settings sssi rorodaan cesars de asse le 122 linked WR 125 RITTER d Le EE 125 Internal COMMUNICATION nennen rn 126 JEC104 Commands 2 s2 ee a 127 IS ele See Heften E 128 DNP3 settings REG P 0s4 2s24000 0 0000008000000 EE anne arena EE EKA OaE ann en ans NEES ENEE ee 131 eege eege Eege S A E 131 e Me DE 132 Settings SCADA u iii 132 DEVICE Xeecissccetecatasctea rE E E A A EAO AOA cuuntestensanet O O 136 DEVICE reguUestSettihgS deene edd EES ENEE EE 136 el ul EE 137 lee TC 138 DNP3 settings REG PE D ssssisisccisscsenssssssscsssecsensosssscesieacsenasassesssisectensosezseesdsaceenscasssesss 139 EEE ac nase te E T degen eege dee eege 139 te Me DEE 140 Settings SCADA ua Ber ch erlernen 140 DEVICE Nee Be a E 142 DEVICE e EE IC 142 le Usel 143 ell ue EE 145 CSO Settings REG P 44432044000000 0500 a eet Eege einen dub teren era ESA aE NN Zoe iss 146 CSO settings REG PE D s essccccectcsisssesssaseccdctssvensssaseesscccsasesssaseesdccessensssaseesdeccsnenssaaseeess 148 CSO RE 148 CSOSUPENVISOLFY SOCEM BS Siac nn 150 Table of Contents 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 4 1 18 4 2 18 5 18 5 1 18 5 2 18 5 3 19 19 1 19 2 19 2 1 19 2 2 19 2 3 19 2 4 19 3 19 3 1 19 3 2 19 3 3 19 3 4 20 20 1 20 2 20 2 1 20 2 2 20 2 3 20 2 4 20 2 5 20 2 6 20 2 7 20 2 8 20 2 9 20 2 10 a eberle Modbus settings sscciissiceciissssccccssisecdissivesscassvecscassncecssbsscetoassn
78. start of Ethernet booter program Transfer via remote via Ethernet connection using COM Server on remote PC and Ethernet booter application programs for TK400 by Remote transfer from PC button The Program automatically chooses free IP address within the given subnet for connec tion with the Ethernet booter Board reset is performed automatically in this case so this way of data transfer is intended for remote usage IP settings for TCP connection with Ethernet booter are used only for the current TCP session This method is not available for the DNP protocol Detection of available boards has to be performed be fore the remote transfer function can be activated Transfer remotely from PC via Ethernet using HTTPS protocol for telecontrol board types TK8xx by Remote transfer from PC button The User has to enter login and pass word for access to HTTPS server typically Admin teledata Program automatically chooses free IP address within the given subnet for connection with the telecontrol board IP settings for TCP connection with telecontrol board are used only for the cur rent TCP session Detection of available boards has to be performed before the remote transfer function can be activated Progress bar operation step and status information are displayed on screen in all cases of data transfer Transfer from telecontrol board to PC Transfer to PC reading of settings from telecontrol board can be performed in similar ways to trans
79. started by pressing the Download from PC to Device button In case of using a TK885 REG PED please make sure to select the primary Ethernet interface indicated by the IP address Telecontrol board TK509 TK517 TK400 serial data transfer Please connect the original A Eberle zero modem cable to the COM1 of the eberie device and activate the data transfer mode of the eberle device deactivate supply voltage and keep the F 1 button pressed while Se ee v Figure 175 Download REG PE D Functionality and user actions of data transfer of settings and firmware to REG PE D tele control board are similar to Remote data transfer which can be found in Advanced mode as described in chapter 8 2 4 User detects the board in the network first to get the board set tings and then selects the chosen board in the table Confirm button is enabled after transfer 21 9 Finishing The last step allows the user to save their newly created settings into the WinConfig XML file that can be processed by WinConfig in Advanced mode and or for exporting the set tings to the XLS file Page 270 WinConfig in Step by Step mode 22 Hardware Save your settings Protocol 7 Finishing Save as WinConfig xml file Export to xis file Excel Cenang Figure 176 Finishing a eberle Devices BE Quick help Save as WinConfig xml File For a backup or if you need your configuration on a later time a
80. the TK860 and TK885 1 card types have only one Ethernet interface available Furthermore there is more conditions in connection with the bonding option e The TK885 board with 2x fibre optic COM ports has always COM 4 port disabled and bonding available e Other versions of TK885 board use two different firmwares Linux Kernels ac cording to the bonding function The checkbox Use Ethernet interfaces bonding in the REG PE D board P settings page of WinConfig is enabled disabled accord ing to the Kernel version of the REG PED board detected and selected in the previous Transfer settings from PC page e Ifthe bonding is required but not supported by the current Kernel loaded in the board go to the Transfer settings from PC page and transfer the settings together with the firmware and correct version of REG PED board e If the bonding option is available in firmware then the COM 4 port cannot be used When using the bonding feature always keep in mind that the correct version of firmware with bonding option has to be selected for boards with electric or electric fiber optics Ethernet interfaces and the bonding option has to be switched ON in the RED PED board IP settings page Also keep in mind that the COM4 serial port cannot be used in the case of firmware with bonding option PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol A network redundancy is to have two independent active paths between two devices The sender TK885 uses two independent netw
81. timeout ms Oto 65535 300 First char timeout Max timeout S Oto 255 Max timeout between master between master requests requests Activate termina checkbox unchecked Activate termination after com tion after mand command IEC101 settings 10 2 3 a eberle A Max waiting time s O to 255 5 Maximum waiting time for com for command after mand after select select Mode of watch Selection blinking Mode of watchdog LED dog LED of values in combo box ComServer settings ComServer settings form part of the IEC settings in WinConfig for TK400 and TK8xx Com Server is included in the protocol conversion firmware in the case of serial protocols with the exception of DNP for the purpose of remote management of telecontrol board configu ration ComServer settings ComServer Use ComServer function Dont use ComServer function Local REG P IP address 192 168 1 216 Gateway IP address 192 168 1 216 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Accept any valid client IP Fi Remote client IP address 192 168 1 64 TCP port data transfer 1023 ON time of TCP LEDs 10ms 2 Figure 20 TK400 ComServer settings Table 7 TK400 COM Server settings Setting Format Range Default Description Use ComServer option box Don t Selection of COM Server function function Don t use use ComServer function Local IP address 4x Oto 255 0 0
82. to Gateway 101 107 device Fardware Protocol Devices Downlosan gt Finishing Quick help Telecontrol board TK400 Ethernet data transfer Click the Download from PC to Device button and reset the telecontrol board afterwards Telecontrol board TK8xx Ethernet data transfer With the help of Detect on LAN all available devices of the pre selected telecontrol board are searched in the local network After selecting the fitting device from the given list the file transfer can be started by pressing the Download from PC to Device button In case of using a TK885 REG PED please make sure to select the primary Ethemet interface indicated by the IP address Telecontrol board TK509 TK517 TK400 serial data transfer Please connect the original A Eberle zero modem cable to the COM of the eberie device and activate the data transfer mode of the eberle device deactivate supply voltage and keep the F1 button pressed while ud un v rardware Protocol Devices Dewnisaan gt Finishing Quick help Telecontrol board TK400 Ethernet data transfer Click the Download from PC to Device button and reset the telecontrol board afterwards Telecontrol board TK8xx Ethernet data transfer With the help of Detect on LAN all available devices of the pre selected telecontrol board are searched in the local network After selecting the fitting device from the given list the file transfer can be
83. to 512 0 Offset connected with remote with remote COT COT Remote COT bits Oto7 0 Remote COT bits of remote of remote offset offset Send group selection of val No Send group change change ues in combo box IEC101 settings 10 4 3 a eberle A Commands Table of settings of individual commands represents command settings This table is com mon for all a eberle devices connected to the telecontrol board The upper line contains execution buttons for work with the individual command lines and for export import of the entire table of commands Selected line in the table is marked by yellow background All changes have to be confirmed by Confirm button Columns to hide Information object address IOA IOA hi millo Control code Command string Scale exponent 100 value Description Confirm Reset Add Insert J Delete I Export J Import J Search Rows count 21 Count of selected rows 0 ln egent J A eegent eeh ae o s200 o da e 7146 v Regauro o x o Hand Aut oO 8193 jo JL 32 DN T147 v aa g20 f regup 1 else regdow o v H nertie O 8194 jo ja d tus si Regswi t jo v Sollwertt o 8195 fo ua J la mas Regsw1 2 o v Sollwert2 Clan o da ju Tag sel Reoswss o w Sowers lasas l In Tian Tie a Im num o Wa
84. type el m mam Parallel 1 F Sl BiT8 0 7 in BYTE c Figure 28 IEC101 Indications for REG PE D LEI ay M IEC101 settings Page 63 We take care of it Page 64 Table 12 IEC101 indications Setting Format Range Default Description Description text 50 chars empty Description Disabled selection of val No Option to disable the data point ues in combo box Information ob O to 16777215 0 IEC address IOA of indication ject address IOA or IOA hi mi lo 3x 0 to 255 IEC object type selection of val TIL Indication type in IEC communi ues in combo box cation RegSys type selection of val Bit8 Indication type in device com ues in combo box munication RPS offset 0 to 65535 RPS offset RPS bit Oto 31 RPS bit Dead band float 0 Dead band Dead band abso selection of val No Selection of Dead band format lute number ues in combo box absolute number or value in per cent Max range float 0 Maximum range Resolution float 0 Resolution Initial value selection of val No Initial value transmision transmision ues in combo box Use in Gl selection of val Yes Use in Gl ues in combo box Group interroga Oto 16 0 Group number for group inter tion rogation Inverted selection of val No Inverted ues in combo box Offset connected O
85. usage of the corre data trans sponding port fer Port 1to 65535 4712 TCP port used for C37 118 protocol PMU base 1to 65535 100 Base identifier of virtual PMU devic identifier es defined by firmware individual PMU identifiers are defined as Base Identifier PMU Order Number e g Base Identifier 100 PMU identifi ers are 101 102 Authorized 4x 0 to 255 192 168 1 92 IP address of central stations SCA central sta 192 168 1 64 DAs authorized to communicate tions IP 192 168 1 43 with telecontrol board using C37 118 addresses protocol ID Read only ID of virtual PMU in C37 118 communication ID is de fined by PMU base identifier Comment text 50 charac User comment ters Name Text 50 charac As defined in Name of virtual PMU in C37 118 ters template communication C37 118 Settings Page 161 We take care of it Page 162 19 2 3 ComServer ComServer tree branch form contains settings of ComServer related parameters COM Server Inactivity Activate Connectiontype IPaddress CP port timeout Baud rate XON XOFF RTSICTS s O Yes v socket v 0 0 0 0 5004 lo 115200 v No Yes Figure 90 C37 118 ComServer Settings Table 69 C37 118 ComServer Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Activate Selection of Yes Activation values in combo box Connection type Selection of Socket Connection type values in
86. with an alpha character and contains only alphanumeric characters and the underscore charac ter Page 197 We take care of it Page 198 20 4 20 5 20 6 Note that there might be more restrictions in other parts of this standard in IEDs imple mented according to previous versions of this standard or due to usage of this name at engineering time Logical Device Configuration At the moment only the description of the logical device can be changed Depending on the ICD file there are normally two logical devices The numeric part at the end of the instance name results in the instance number This instance number has to be related to the physical device in the menu Devices To do this the field Device relocation in the menu Devic es has to have the same numeric value Logical Node Configuration ei sc Config Bay Tools Help Project ExtOnly save amp Ext REG_DPD 110924 Std_Goose icd E Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Log Device Properties JED Ei Ke A Name Value 2 LDAA inst 1 H LN LLNO LLNO desc ATCC 329 LN LPHD LPHD 1 InClass ATCC zl LN GGIO1 GGIO 1 InType REGS_REGD_ATCC1 LN GGIO2 GGIO 2 LN ATCC ATCC 1 m LN Goose Subscribers alarms GGIO 3 Object Editors LN Goose Extensions GGIO 4 5 4 LD REGDP1 REGDP1 Not available LN LLNO LLNO Figure 131 Logical Node Configuratio
87. without jump activated ers DNP3 RS232 used radio button checked DNP3 RS232 used option for board without jumpers Baud rate of serial Bd selection of 9600 Baud rate of serial port DNP port DNP3 values in combo box ON time of serial 10 ms 1 to 255 4 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Link address of 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG P REG P Link address of 0 to 65535 1 Link address of DNP master DNP3 master Inter character Fosc 12 1000 to 18000 Timeout between two charac timeout 65535 ters in telegram Timeout after ms Oto 255 0 Timeout after inter character interchar timeout expiration Time till reset 10 ms 1 to 65535 100 Time until reset after cold re start Number of TSDU 1to 128 1 Number of TSDU fragments fragments Size of each TSDU 249 2048 249 Size of each TSDU fragment fragment Using confirma option box Not selected Using confirmation for EVENT tion for EVENT response response Timeout for re 10 ms 1 to 65535 80 Timeout for receiving AL con ceiving AL firmation confirmation Number of repeti O to 255 1 Number repetitions after AL tions after AL confirm timeout confirm timeout DNP3 settings REG P Page 135 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description Timeout se 10 ms 1 to 65535 500 Timeout select operate func lect operate tion function Event queue size 10 to 1024 256 Event queue size 14 3 Device x 14 3 1 Device request settings Devic
88. 0 0 COM Server IP address Accept any valid option box selected Selection whether COM Server should client IP accept any valid IP for connection Remote IP address 4x Oto 255 0 0 0 0 Accepted IP address for connection Gateway IP address 4x Oto 255 0 0 0 0 IP address of default gateway Subnet mask 4x0t0 255 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask TCP port O to 65535 1023 COM Server TCP port Changing of these settings is not recommended IEC101 settings Page 55 We take care of it Page 56 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 3 Setting Format Range Default Description ON time of TCP ms 1 to 60 2 ON time of TCP LEDs LEDs COM Server for REG P TK400 telecontrol board is necessary for all remote operations in WinConfig i e all remote data transfers detections on LAN remote comparison of set tings with connected board etc If COM Server is switched off only local manual operations of WinConfig can be used ComServer settings IEC101 for REG PE D For parameters of ComServer function in IEC101 for REG PE D see the EC103 for REG PE D chapter in this manual Supervisory settings IEC101 for REG PE D For parameters of Supervisory settings in IEC101 for REG PE D see the EC103 for REG PE D chapter in this manual Linked devices The Linked Devices tree branch shows survey of all 8 devices that can be used in settings created by WinConfig Only the devices checked as Enabled are described in the follow
89. 04 indications Indications m Columns to hide Description IEC object type RegSys type Information object address IOA IOA hifmifio Abs deviation Scale Max value RPS of Confirm Reset Search Row count 81 Count of selected rows 0 even ee CA gt Elfen nos ne O Eee er Er Lilfiave reguiator is siave book Mfes IR JE P P fi II Reaelabweichuna tolerance band settina Ms Fo TV Tlfe197 lo Ho ils lo Ip Figure 65 IEC104 indications Table 44 IEC104 indications Setting Format Range Default Description Description text 50 chars empty Description IEC object type selection of TI1 Indication type in IEC communication values in list box RegSys type selection of Bit Indication type in device communica values in list tion box Information ob Oto 0 IEC address IOA of indication ject address IOA 16777215 IOA hi mi lo or 3x 0 to 255 Abs deviation float 0 Absolute deviation value Scale float 0 Scale value Max value 0 to 65535 32767 Max value IEC104 settings Setting RPS offset Format Range Oto 255 Default 0 a eberle A Description RPS offset RPS bit selection of values in list box 0 RPS bit Use in Gl selection of values in list box Yes Usage of indication in General Interro gation Gr O selection of values in list box Yes Group 0 in general in
90. 1 to 65535 5011 TCP port 13 3 Linked Devices Device Enabled Identifier of device Poll type 4 faa RPS 2 Ip RPS 3 im RPS 5 RPS s oO RPS e lon C ns 7 o IRPS 8 o Res Figure 61 IEC104 Linked devices 13 3 1 Time synchronization IEC104 time synchronization tree branch contains IEC104 specific settings for time synchro nization Time synchronization nte Occ Time source Synchronize all devices connected to ELAN U Sync period of connected devices min NTP specific NTP primary server IP address NTP secondary server IP address 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 62 IEC104 time synchronization settings IEC104 settings Page 125 We take care of it Page 126 13 3 2 Table 41 IEC104 time synchronization Setting Format Range Default Description Time source option box NTP Time source selection Sync all devices option box Not selected Sync all devices connected to connected to ELAN ELAN Sync period of min O to 999 1 Sync period of connected de connected devices vices 0 disabled NTP primary server 4x0 to 255 0 0 0 0 NTP primary server IP address IP address NTP secondary 4x0to255 0 0 0 0 NTP secondary server IP ad server IP address dress Internal Communication Communication settings tree branch contains communicatio
91. 19200 v Parity OFF wv ON time of serial LEDs ms 4 RS485 activated Lal Protocol settings Link address of REG PE D 103 Link address of DNP3 master 1 Inter character timeout ms 4 Time till reset ms 1000 Number of TSDU fragments 1 Size of each TSDU fragment byte 2048 Using confirmation for EVENT response Timeout for receiving AL confirmation ms 800 Number of repetitions after AL confirm timeout 1 Timeout select operate function ms 5000 Mode of watchdog LED blinking v Figure 73 Advanced settings SCADA REG PE D Page 140 DNP3 settings REG PE D a eberle A Table 52 DNP3 advanced settings REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description Line type selection of serial Type of communication line values in serial Ethernet TCP Ethernet combo box UDP Authorized cen 4x Oto 255 192 168 1 68 IP addresses of central stations tral stations IP 192 168 1 64 authorized to connect to tele addresses 192 168 1 43 control board Port 1 to 65535 20000 TCP or UDP Port Serial port selection of COM1 Selection of DNP3 COM port values in combo box Baud rate of serial Bd selection of 19200 Baud rate of serial port DNP port DNP3 values in combo box Parity selection of Off Parity of serial port DNP values in combo box ON time of serial ms O to 255 4 ON time of serial LEDs
92. 1EC61850 a eberle A Setting Range Default Description CSE trace Activate checkbox unchecked CSE trace activation CSE trace TCP port 1to 65535 10888 TCP port DCF77 trace Acti checkbox unchecked DCF77 trace activation vate DCF77 trace TCP 1to 65535 10777 TCP port port COM Server Trace checkbox unchecked COM Server Trace activation Activate Trace COM Server Trace checkbox unchecked COM Server Trace Verbose Out Trace Output put COM Server radio but checked Radio button to select PARAM Trace Trace via ton Connector or TCP port as output PARAM Connector interface for COM Server debug COM Server Trace radio but unchecked Messages Trace via TCP Port ton COM Server Trace 1to 65535 10897 COM Server Trace TCP port TCP port COM Server checkbox checked COM Server Trace Logging with Trace Logging with Timestamp Timestamp Mirroring Activate checkbox unchecked Mirror port debug option activa tion Mirroring TCP port 1to 65535 55777 Mirror port TCP port IEC61850 Page 245 We take care of it Page 246 20 10 6 Time synchronization The NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration is used for time synchronization The SNTP client is implemented as a single thread which periodically requests NTP servers or listens for NTP broadcasts and Ipv4 multicasts and optionally sends SNTP unicast re quests to defined NTP servers The SNTP client will be auto
93. 3 Operate on object w REGtiefer EN Lower Tap Figure 70 DNP3 commands REG P Table 49 DNP3 commands REG P Setting Format Range Default Description Output type selection of Relay Output type values in combo box Obj index 0 to 128 0 Control code selection of Operate on Control code values in object combo box Scale selection of 1 Scale valid for analog data type values in combo box Command string text 50 charac empty Command string ters Description text 50 charac empty User description ters The function for storage of descriptions of commands and data points in the telecontrol il board memory is not implemented for DNP3 protocol Settings transferred back to PC from REG P telecontrol board will have empty descriptions of commands and data points DNP3 settings REG P Page 137 We take care of it Page 138 14 3 3 Indications Indications tree branch contains DNP specific settings for DNP protocol Indications Columns to hide Description DNP3 object type RegSys type DNP3 obj index Static definitions Event definitions Eventclass Abs deviation Sc rl tn Import Advanced Row count 105 Count of selected rows 0 Tamam Event definitions Ge Log Oove ow O O Binary input Oase Processing Error Binary input ell input ELAN Comms Eror Ero sd Comms Error a Error Binary input
94. 37 118 basic settings Table 66 C37 118 basic settings Setting Format Range Default Description Settings de Text 50 charac Filename of Short user description of settings scription ters open settings file or name of settings file Line type Selection of Ethernet TCP Type of line for C37 118 protocol values in Ethernet serial line combo box PMU base iden tifier 1 to 65535 100 Base identifier of virtual PMU de vices defined by firmware individual PMU identifiers are defined as Base Identifier PMU Order Number e g Base Identifier 100 PMU identifiers are 101 102 Ei Authorized central stations IP addresses 4x 0 to 255 As defined in the template IP address of central stations SCADAs authorized to communi cate with telecontrol board using C37 118 protocol C37 118 Settings Page 159 We take care of it Page 160 19 2 19 2 1 Advanced Serial Port Assignment Serial Port assignment tree branch form contains common settings of serial ports for proto cols available in C37 117 firmware This WinConfig page also contains internal checks to assure that each serial port can be used only one time in the configuration Serial Ports Settings el DCF serial port COM Server serial port COM3 wv SCADA protocol interface COM1 w COM1 Port TCP port Internal device interface COM2 w 5013 Figure 88 C37 118 Serial Port Assignmen
95. 4 een Haan las 157 MODBUS COMMANGS EE 158 C37 118 basicsettings unserer uge NEE 159 C37 118 Serial Port Aeslenrment 160 C37 116 SCADA Settings ne eege Eege edd gege 161 C37 118 ComServer Settings aaa ae euer een 162 C37 118 Supervis ry settings aneesenae ee iiie sia 165 637 118 LINKER Te 167 C37 118 Time Synchr nizati n an essen ana Eae rae date 168 637 118 Internal COMMUNICATION u uen een 169 C37 118 HR EE 170 C37 118 INGICALIONS EE 171 Product IED MOE 28 eteedaige eege ed 172 SCADASETLINBS En ern ee teiictaeteuestanseicedsedeteas E 173 Execute SCL_Config engineering Tool 173 Displaying the project configuration cccssscecccecesseseseceeececeesesneaeceeeeuseesesteaeeeseesseesegs 174 Displaying the properties of nodes 174 Bisplaying thelCDfile eraseanssenne ran ee e 175 Adding and deleting devices ana zandme nk 176 Renaming device ar raue ie 176 Adding deleting and renaming logical nodes ssnsssssssssssnsssssssserrrsrssssrserrrsrssssrsernnsessno 177 Editine Elle een 178 Removing Data Objects nein a 184 Restore Data Objects from template ccceccessececssssececssssececsssaeeecsesaeeeesesaeeeesesaeeeeseaaes 184 Renaming the Data Oblects irinen sii eeann dirii tie drania 185 Confirmation to rename DO list unneeesssnnnenessnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 185 Changing of DO Data Class santeet EAEE riten aA EaR AEAEE RERED ESSES 186 Changing the contro
96. 55 0 Frequency of interrogation of IP addresses polls for IP of all devices Value is configurable in the check range 0 255 The default value is O set ting is not used Setting is applicable only for REG D device 12 4 4 Internal communication EOR D Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd 115200 7 Parity EVEN si ON time of serial LEDs ms 10 Timeout for reception of first char ms 90 Inter character timeout ms 80 Time to wait after answer rec ms 20 Number of repeats for SYNC cycle 2 Number of poll repests 1 Round time down go Number of polls for IP check 16 Earth faults Earth fault acquisition on off ies ONo Initial delay of first sample request ms 2000 Earth fault soquisition timeout sec 100 Delay of receiving sample from device ms 500 Delay of List Records transmission ms 300 Sampling rate divisor 1 3 3 Full scale valustion in records 32767 Figure 49 IEC103 Devices EOR D Internal communication Page 102 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Table 29 IEC103 Devices EOR D Communication settings Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate of device serial port device serial values in port combo box Parity Selection of EVEN Parity values in combo box ON time of ms 1 to 65535 10 ON time of serial LEDs
97. 60 Figure 161 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 External Dataset Object Settings 2ucscsenennennennnnenennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnensnne nenn 196 ege 197 IED Server Description astra ee ed eege 197 Logical Node Confieuratton 198 Status Data Mapped in device data 199 Status Data Point not mapped in device data uruneesnsnseseenenonnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnneen 199 Example of DPS complex status 202 Control Value Configuration Single Command 204 Control Value Configurations Multi Commande 210 Executing Command Pre COnditions nennen 211 Condition Type behavior 2222000022220nnnennennnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnneennnnnnennnnnnennnnennnenn 211 Condition extended Settings aka 212 Acknowledgement Condition Settings nenn 212 ACK NACK test behavior ccccecccssceceesseeecseseeeceeaeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeceeueeeseeaeeeseeneeeeseneeeeeeea 213 Control Model BDarameter roads saas oid hsniron asiassa raais 213 Set point Value Configuration only with Single Command 2z00 222s00eene no 214 GOOSE light Control Blocks Confteuration en 215 Capture fragment of GOOSE light telegram cc ccccccccsssssssceceeeceeseseeseeeeecesseseeaeeeeeens 216 GOOSE light Input architecture 2 aasers aaa sea ken 217 Publisher and Subscriber sides cccccccsssscecesssececeeeeeeeceseeeeecseseneeceseee
98. 8 Count of selected rows 0 RES IOA function a VPS U a number IEC object type MEA num 1 Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time Y ro defined fue sl I fi Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time not defined Hu Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time ls ret defined IOlkozer use Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time Y rot defined IO une fal pts cu td No 5 IMllro2s u23 SR Ma Ie m 1 Figure 52 IEC103 Device x Indications PQI D Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time ls be defined ype 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time Y rot defined Type 4 Time tagged measurands with relative time Y ES defined Table 32 IEC103 Device x Indications PQI D Setting Format Range Default Description Disabled Option boxes No Enabling disabling of individual data point IOA function type 2x 0 to 255 0 The corresponding IEC data information type must be entered The Type number Identification is used for the compatible range IEC object type Selection of Type 1 Time IEC 60870 5 103 type of data values in tagged mes combo box sage MEA number in Selection of not defined Information order number of ASDU values in Common Address Application combo box Service Data Unit ASDU It is applied only to type 3 and 9 Processing o
99. Before adding it will be necessary to select a Control Block and Data Attributes Attributes list is defined by a Data Object type from template section of ICD Control Block Name DataSet Name GoDs_Reg214 Data Object Name TapChq Data Attributes valWTr posVal to add valWTrtransind q Figure 122 Adding the Data Object to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block Note For structure valWTr data attribute q will be added twice for each attribute To Data Set will be added 4 records LN hst DO Name DAName 1 TapChg valWTr posval 1 Trg a 1 TapChg valWTritransind MER a BE BE Figure 123 Adding structure valWTr to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block Page 192 IEC61850 20 2 11 5 20 2 11 6 IEC61850 a eberle A GOOSE External Publisher Internal Subscriber Side The application contains up to 16 internal subscribers They are able to receive GOOSE messages from external GOOSE Publisher Each subscriber can receive the messages from one Publisher Each subscriber contains a list of the external data objects which are includ ed in messages from conformed external publisher Subscribers and data objects are shown as the logical structure tree on box GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration ERBE CC D Idx 0 IED_ACTRL LLNOSGOSControl_DataSet2 4 Num 1 PG_LS PG_CB 4 Num 3 PG_TR1 PG_IS1 AY Num 5 PG_TR2 PG_IS2 WAY N
100. Blocks box Tasks Configuration GOOSE Light ICDfile Leg GOOSE Control Blocks GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration S z S D Tua he Q Figure 116 GOOSE Control Blocks list Selected block can be removed using function Remove GOOSE Control Block When user deletes a block the ICD sections for this block are removed GSE GSEControl Da taSet Function Add GOOSE Control Block will prompt to define the required parameters for the new block The new block will be shown in the list The maximum number of blocks is 4 ee LDevice Instance GOOSE ID Newld Control Block Name NewBlockName DataSet Name NewDataSet Create Cancel Figure 117 Parameters for the new GOOSE Control Block GOOSE Publisher Control Block settings For the selected in the list GOOSE control block is available to view and edit the parameters of this block The properties editor has 3 pages of settings Page Common Settings allows defining names and descriptions of main sections 1EC61850 IEC61850 a eberle A GOOSE Control Block Editor Common Settings Communication Settings Data Set LDevice Instance GOOSE ID Gold_Reg214 Control Block Name GoCb_Reg214 DataSet Name GoDs_Reg214 Control Block Description Allin One State Binary DataSet Description All GOOSE states and binaries inputs Figure 118 Common set
101. C 60870 5 103 value The value is calculated for each set channel using EOR D factor commands EorKni X or EorKnu Y accordingly with type of channel voltage or current IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 111 We take care of it Page 112 Setting Format Range De Description fault Rated float 1 Rated secondary value RSV defined in secondary 7 2 6 19 IEC 60870 5 103 value Value set to 1 for EORSys Datatype Selection of INT8 Device data type values in combo box Offset Oto7 12 Channel data offset in Records Request 63 charac empty Factor request command string command ters string string Descrip 63 charac empty User description tion ters string The conformity of IEC channels and earth fault channels of EOR D shown in figure below EOR D earth fault record is able to read and to save in COMTRADE or comma separated CSV file format The data mapping of channels particular are are explained on an example fe Find Next Strg F SS Ei I Show BI O changes 7 St rschriebe f r Bahn konver Date format YYYY MM DD hh m I Show BI O changes LIT St rschnebe f r Bahn ki Date format CY MM D I Destination path ENwinEOC SC F Get all available faut record files Comtrade Je Don t overwrite existing files EAWnEDC Figure 56 Read Faults Record from EOR D With the help of WinE
102. C104 channel can be operated in client or server modes the channel mode assumes correspond ing remote side with corresponding remote IP addresses and remote ASDUs i e IEC104 remote client for server mode and IEC104 server for client mode IEC104 settings Page 115 Page 116 Basic e Fr pe peaa J Pr ve ES Si ke fr je I 8 pl Peso e ASDU address 1 JiAspun b Jaspum i sh 1 w Figure 57 IEC104 basic settings IEC104 settings a eberle A Table 37 IEC104 settings Setting Format Range Default Description Settings descrip text 50 characters Filename of Short user description of tion open settings settings file or name of settings file Enabled checkbox unchecked Option to enable disable the corresponding IEC104 channel Remote IP ad 4x 0 to 255 192 168 1 68 IP addresses of remote dress 192 168 1 64 Station authorized for con 192 168 1 43 nection with telecontrol board Remote ASDU 0 to 65534 1 ASDU address of remote address station authorized for con nection with telecontrol board ASDU address 0 to 65534 1 ASDU address ASDU2 ASDU1 or 0 to 255 Identifier of de text AA or A 1 to 9 AA Identifier of device vice to Z 1 to 4 IEC104 settings Page 117 We take care of it 13 2 Advanced 13 2 1 Settings SCADA IEC104 Settings SCADA tree branch contains complete IEC104 specific settings Interface settings Port 404 Protoco
103. Coil 6001 BOOLEAN direct command without space 0 1 regcotb 0 RegAUTO Regulator A Manual Automatic E Write single Coi lem BOOLEAN W direct command without space 0 1 V regeoto 1 RegHoeher Regulator A Higher C Write Single Coil br 6003 BOOLEAN direct command without space 0 1 regcotb 1 RegTiefer Regulator A Lower E Write single Coil e008 BOOLEAN ell direct command without space 0 1 regcoth 2 Regswi Regulator A Select setpoint DI Write single Coil 6007 BOOLEAN direct command without space 0 1 ze regcotb 6 RegParaProgA Regulator A Parallel program activat amp u UL u 1 gt Figure 86 MODBUS commands Table 65 MODBUS Commands Setting Format Range Default Description Function 1to 128 1 Function number Address 1to 128 0 Information address Type 1to 128 0 Data type Scale 1to 128 0 Scale Max value 1to 128 0 Maximum value Command text 50 chars empty Command string Description text 50 chars empty User description Modbus settings 19 19 1 a eberle A C37 118 Settings Basic Basic settings tree branch form contains common settings of for C37 118 protocol Settings description C37118_GDASys_BASIC Protocol settings Line type ethernet TCP v PMU units base identifier 100 Authorized central stations IP addresses 192 168 1 92 192 168 1 64 192 168 1 43 Figure 87 C
104. Command 0 Command Example RegSWI VALUE Figure 143 Set point Value Configuration only with Single Command Table 86 Single command Set point settings Form entry Description Common Status and Measured Read Write IEC Data Type Defines the corresponding IEC control data type Mapping in Poll String acti vate The parameter defines using this data attribute in internal device data If No not mapped in internal data has been selected there is not corresponding offset in internal poll device data Read Write Device Data Type Defines the corresponding XXXSysTM device data type If IG NORE is selected or Deviation and offset are used is not checked this data point is not allocated Device data type determines the interpretation of Deviation Read Poll String Offset Defines offset of the device answer string where this data is locat ed If 1 the data point will not be mapped to the answer string The parameter can be adjusted from 1 255 By default it is 1 Scale in Write Command Normally scale is used as exponent with single commands If a Boolean IEC control data type is selected scale has special meaning See following tables The parameter can be adjusted from 127 128 By default set to 0 Write Command Defines the command string which is assigned with converted IEC control value of scale rule The result is sent to XXXSysTM device GOOSE
105. D then GOOSE ID Control Block and DataSet names MAC address will be filled from it Tasks Configuration GOOSE Dog ICD file I Log Gees Object Editors General settings for GOOSE GOOSE4ight Etemal Publisher Configuration ae Y E GoCb_RegATCC Subscriber activate GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration REG PE D Subscriber Index 0 15 0 IER MAC Address 01 0C CD 01 00 00 N de 0 IED_ACTRL LLNOSGOSControl_DataSet2 So F Num 1 P H B r E EE ea ES Num 3 PG_TR1 PG_IS1 Control Block Name IED_ACTRL LLNOSGOS Control_DataSet2 9 Num 5 PG_TR2 PG_IS2 DataSet Name IED_ACTRL LLNOSDataSet2 Ag Num 0 QUALITY ALARM ER ldx 1 GoCb_RegATCC Application ID dec hex 1 amp 01 H g Num 5 ATCC 1 OpCntRs stVal 9 Num 6 ATCC 1 OpCntRs q K Num 7 ATCC 1 TapChg valWTr posVal Failure Handling Failure service interval ms 4000 After first GOOSE message 1 Objects will be initialized a 1 Objects will be initialized 2 Their commands will be executed Failure detection commands At publisher timeout detection this command will be sent B30 1 If publisher is received successfully again this command will be sent These Commands will be sent to Logical Device Station LDevice A Comment SG1 Ok Cance Figure 127 External Publisher Settings IEC61850 Page 195 We take care of it 20 2 11 8 External Dataset Object Settings F
106. DC program see Figure above records data from EOR D device E1 saved to CSV file The IEC channel data are located in the column i1 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 113 We take care of it Page 114 12 5 6 12 5 7 EOR D defined settings The meaning of offset is explained in table below i1 earth faults values are located in the faults record with begin offset 4 Table 36 Channel offset term 1320 11540 1 0 1 0 0 0 963 0 0 0 383 73 0 0 0 Data from WinEDC CSV file 0 2233 2488 4 43 489 1 0 0 1 645 2488 29 92 450 1 0 1 2 2233 2488 4 43 359 1 1 1 3 5111 2488 21 43 359 1 1 1 4 5111 2488 29 92 359 1 1 1 5 5111 2488 29 43 359 1 0 1 6 645 2488 194 406 489 1 0 1 Description Single disturbance value SDV SDV F16 1 16 lt 1 1 2 gt is defined and calculated according to IEC requirements The raw values are transmitted as integer in range from 32768 up to 32767 and then normalized to 1 0 1 0 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A N 13 IEC104 settings IEC 104 settings are available only for TK860 and TK885D telecontrol boards Chapter IEC104 settings describes only settings not described above 13 1 Basic The basic settings tree branch contains table of 20 available IEC104 channels Each IE
107. EG data type selection of valuesin Bit REG data type combo box DNP3 obj index 0 to 65535 0 DNP object index Static definitions selection of valuesin no class O Static definitions combo box point Event definitions selection of values in no events Event definitions combo box Event class selection of valuesin 1 Event class combo box Abs deviation float 0 Absolute deviation Scale float Scale RPS offset Oto 255 RPS offset RPS bit selection of values in RPS bit combo box Description text 50 characters empty User description Simulation selection ofvaluesin No Option whether the data combo box point value can be simu lated Simulation value according to the data 0 Simulated data point val DNP3 settings REG PE D Page 143 We take care of it Page 144 Setting Format Range Default Description type ue Simulation of the data point value is new feature in WinConfig v 11 0 6 User can allow sim ulation and prepare simulation values of individual data points The simulation can be consequently launched by Run simulation button in the online WinConfig in REG PE D tele control board DNP3 settings REG PE D 15 3 3 Commands Columns to hide Output type Obj index Controlcode Scale Command string Description a eberle A Rows count 26 Count of selected rows 0 RIEF A Control code Scale Command string Descri
108. GGIO 1 LD EOR D master relay 8 E8 LN Transient forward GGIO 1 Are you sure that want to change all Figure 110 Confirmation to rename DO list verifications of new name A change the name from mandatory DO list is blocked If the new name exists renaming is canceled Rename DO in LNodeType from section DataTypeTemplates Rename DOI in Logical Node Pwr em Rename FCDA in DataSets of Logical Node Page 185 We take care of it 20 2 9 Changing of DO Data Class Changing of DO Data Class is accessible for changing SPC to DPC and vice versa In this case DO Editor is displaying on editor panel 947 DON Ind23 DO Editor 947 DON Ind24 947 DON Ind25 Common Data Class SPC v ZP DOI Ind26 E 947 DON Ind27 947 DON Ind28 vie DON Ind29 Og DON Ind30 947 DOI Ind3t 947 DON Ind32 947 DOI SPCSO1 cc ee co a os O on Figure 111 Changing of DO Data Class Algorithm of changing of DO Data Class Changing of DO Data Class is accessible for changing SPC to DPC and vice versa Search DOType in LNodeType from section DataTypeTemplates where id new type SPC or DPC DOType has not DA with name SBOw If DOType has DA with name dataNs it is preferring Setting the new value of Type Id for DO DO will to have new Data Class vn e W een nr If new DOType is not searched then changing is canceled Pag
109. GOOSE Control Blocks ag Gi GoCb_RegATCC GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration Bik oie ww o S E Idx 0 IED_ACTRL LLNOSGOSControl_DataSet2 4 Num 1 PG_LS PG_CB AY Num 3 PG_TR1 PG_IS1 AAG Num 5 PG_TR2 PG_IS2 AY Num 0 QUALITY ALARM Object Editors General settings for GOOSE Terminal Autoloading GSE GOOSE activate EI GSE Control Blocks adjustment activate d Retransmission Strategy Default Step Delay ms 2000 Retransmission Strategy Type geometric Arithmetic scheme First interval ms 200 Multiplier 2 Max retransmission timeout ms 4000 Profile scheme Number of Intervals 6 1th interval ms 1000 2th interval ms 1500 3h interval ms 2000 4th interval ms 2500 5th interval ms 3000 Ok Cancel Figure 115 GOOSE settings page Limitations and scope The GOOSE features are applied only for sAddr type ASCIIx61850 Attributes that can be added to the GOOSE publisher Data Set stVal mag f valWTr transind Page 189 We take care of it Page 190 20 2 11 2 20 2 11 3 20 2 11 4 valWTr posVal e q Common GOOSE Settings for Publisher side Editor General Settings for GOOSE provides editing common settings activation timing strategy and timing settings GOOSE Publisher Control Block functions The GOOSE Publisher Control Block List is available on the GOOSE Control
110. IEC101 device settings for REG PE D cc cccccsscccecssececeessececeesececeeaeeesecsaseessesaeeeeeesaeeeeees 61 Ieren EE 62 IEC101 indications u cenee ea seitens reiner hessen 64 IECIOT Command E 65 IECIOT Command EE 66 JSeiabke cul EA EE 66 Meaning OF Status Dita sirensis iinit eege deed 70 lECI03 settings an 2 ek rue 72 IERT ee eege 74 IEC103 basic settings REG DEID nennen 80 IEC103 settings SCADA PQI D usa ee Rinne bil 82 IEC103 settings SCADA for FOR D 86 IEC103 ComServer settings POL 89 IEC103 ComServer settings PQI D Channels nennen 91 IEC103 ComServer settings FORD 93 IEC103 Superwvisory settings anne 97 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings POLD 98 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings FORD 99 IEC103 Internal communication PQI D uuseseseneeenenenenenenenenenenennnenenenenenensnnnennnennnenennnnnenenn 100 IEC103 Devices EOR D Communication settinge cc ccesessssesssesetsstssteseesaeaeeeaeaeaeeeaeaeaeees 103 IEC103 Device x Device settings PQU D cccssssssscsessssscssseseseaeseseseaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaes 105 IEC103 Device x Device settings FORD 106 List of Tables Page 281 We take care of it Page 282 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56
111. N extension over Ethernet CSE IEC61850 Page 237 We take care of it Page 238 20 10 3 1 Table 95 ELAN extension over Ethernet CSE Setting Format Range Default Description Version CSE version read only Activate CSE checkbox ON OFF CSE switch ON OFF Serial port COM4 Selection of CSE serial port Read on ly To change CSE serial port go to Serial ports assignment tree branch Baud rate of Bd 115200 Baud rate of serial port read only serial port Parity none Parity read only RTS CTS ON OFF off RTS CTS read only XON XOFF ON OFF off XON XOFF read only Port 1 to 65535 TCP listen port Interface Selection of val Selection of Ethernet interface ues in combo box Activate Selection of val Activation of TCP send port Yes No ues in combo box IP address 4x 0 to 255 IP address Port 0 to 65535 TCP port Use case Setting for two REG PE X connected via CSE In the following example two REG PEDs were used where the first REG PED had the IP 193 162 58 1 and the second 193 168 58 3 The channel of the device has to be set to non activated In the following use case port addresses 130030 till 130037 were predefined and the first two used Configuration of the first REG PED ELAN extension over Eth CSE Version 1 06 00 build 10 Activate CSE V Interface settings Serial port MOMI Baud rate of serial port Bd 115200 Parity List
112. NP3 tgz TK860_IEC104 tgz TK860_IEC103 tgz TK860_MODBUS tgz TK860_CSO tgz TK860_C37118 tgz TK860_IEC61850 tgz protocol specific applications and web pages Scope of Delivery Page 11 We take care of it Wl DAON Date 19 09 2012 Firmware REG PED Supported XML settings from WinConfig Settings set in directory XML settings file settings xml mnt jffs2 param others files and directories are only temporary generated after each start from set tings xml Images Firmware ramdisk uRamdisk BusyBox common libraries and utilities Kernel kernel_16MB tgz kernel_16MB_SCC4 tgz kernel_32MB tgz kernel_32MB_SCC4 tgz Linux kernel for TK885D board with 16 and 32 MB flash TK885_DNP3 tgz TK885_1EC104 tgz TK885_1EC103 tgz TK885_MODBUS tgz TK885_CSO tgz TK885_C37118 tgz TK885_1EC61850 tgz protocol specific applications and web pages Page 12 Supported Software a eberle A Firmware REG P REG P Version TK509 IEC101 balanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101B509V4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC101 unbalanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101U509V4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC103 04 03 2010 asciireg103_509V4211 hex Version 42 11 DNP3 16 11 2009 DNP3 hex REG P version TK517 IEC101 balanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101BEXTV4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC101 balanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101BINTV4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC101 unbalanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101
113. O to 650 Timeout for analog measurements cyclic sending cyclic sending 0 disable Time to stop reg S Oto650 O Time to stop regulator interrogation interrogation after IEC communication break Round time down option round Rounding time selection up box down IEC104 Commands The IEC104 commands table contains commands and also data points transmitted in the di rection toward to the REG PE D board Commands Columns to hide Confirm __Reset JI oa IC CD CE Cine Search rows count 19 Count of selected rows 0 Common address of ASDU Information object address IOA IOA hi mi lo Control code Command string Scale exponent 100 value Description o sam tiie A 10A hilmi Control 4 Command string Scale exponent de I BR L e M of Ka J b pe pe Tuama M RegAuTO later command without space 1 0 RW PaniAuto of ee fo JS lb marme y s2 020 i regup 1 else regdouns direct command without space 1 0 Regier A Ho of i ars S ife2__ uf2__ r4smise WlResswer direct command without space 1 0 M ege A Se oh ke fo EB _I mssmse WllResswe2 direct inverted command witho
114. PARAM connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck O Trace via TCP Port recommended TCP File TCP Port Log to File Attention Available memory on board very limited 10689 o Logging with Timestamp Attention Causes performance reduction C General options Extended Trace for Common Functions U Parse Settings o General Warnings and Errors o General Events o Process Image o Time Synchronization SNTP and Device C Commands Execution o Eberle Device Verbose Output U Link Layer o Link State Machine Application Layer CT IEC 60870 5 103 Verbose Output O Link Layer o Link State Machine Application Layer U IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 95 We take care of it COM Server Trace Activate o Level User Trace via PARAM Connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended oO TCP Port Logging with Timestamp Performance reduction COM Server Tx Rx Mirroring Activate trace TCP port Figure 45 Supervisory settings REG PE D Page 96 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Table 25 IEC103 Supervisory settings Setting Format Range Default Description Level Selection of Deactivate Level of Log messages values in combo box Trace output radio button PARAM Option to trace via PARAM connector connector or via TCP General options checkbox uncheck
115. QI DA with REG PEL connected Your PC host PC IP address of your PC EDC File Ramdisk Kernel Files IV Update Ramdisk d WC_Development target RPL edc Ze Iw Update Kernel Deactivate communication channels to increase the security of the device I FIP Telnet Web Server HTTP Update Settings Exit Figure 1 The RPL window WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED Page 17 We take care of it Page 18 6 3 To transfer Linux Kernel and RAM disk into the REG PE x follow these steps Connect the PARAM connector of REG PE x board and your computer with the RS232 cable supplied with the eberle device or with any serial null modem cable Connect your computer and the REG PE x board by Ethernet cable Some Ethernet adapters do not switch to the correct mode automatically so please use preferably a crosslink patch cable Fill the IP address lines in RPL window Use the button to browse the edc file placed in the WinConfig installation fold ers There are two edc files distributed in the WinConfig setup the difference is in the versions of Kernel with without support of bonding Select whatever of the two files as bonding and related features can be set later using the Change of IP settings for REG PE D telecontrol boards WinConfig function Press the Update button The update process can be seen in the RPLtab Terminal Communication with REG PE D telecontrol board in WinConfig 11 A higher le
116. REG x 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG x Link address of DNP3 0 to 65535 103 Link address of DNP3 master master 21 5 Time synchronization Time synchronization page appears in the case when the used telecontrol board or protocol enables time synchronization using NTP server User selects time synchronization either by NTP server or by the used protocol Hardware Sipretecoli gt Devices Download Finishing 4 Timesync PANAR a L S Time Source Please configure the time synchronization The Time Source defines the Source which provides the time synchronization of the communication systems If the time ZE ONTP O Protocol synchronization shall be done by IEC 60870 5 104 protocol e g the SCADA NTpsenerip 0 000 System you have to choose the entry IEC If you have a NTP Server Network Time 2nd NTP Server 0 0 0 0 Protocol Server inside your network you also can choose the NTP entry Note that E you have to define the NTP Server IP if you want to use that kind of time synchronization NTP Server IP The NTP Server P defines the Ethernet address of the NTP Server In general you can ask your SCADA engineer for information on the IP address of NTP Server 2nd NTP Server Use this entry to define a second NTP Server If you do not have a second NTP Server unn ran leave thie entru unchannen 7 Figure 171 Time synchronization Table 107 Time synchronization Setting Format Range Default Descripti
117. RLE Identification bytes 0 3 0 0 0 Io Figure 34 IEC103 specific settings Settings SCADA for IEC103 REG P Page 71 We take care of it Page 72 Table 17 IEC103 settings Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of IEC Bd selection of 19200 Baud rate of IEC103 serial port serial values in combo box ON time of serial 10 ms 1 to 255 1 ON time of serial LEDs indicat LEDs ing activity on the IEC serial interface Link address of 1 to 254 1 Link address of REG P REG P ASDU address 1 to 254 1 ASDU address Inter character ms 2 to 100 4 Timeout between two charac timeout ters in telegram Timeout after ms O to 255 10 Timeout after interchar timeout interchar expiration IEC address of 0 to 65535 0 IEC address IOA of multipoint error multipoint 0 to 255 for errors 0 undefined function type information num ber Compatibility byte selection of 2 Compatibility byte values in combo box Identification text 8 chars empty Identification string string Identification O to 255 0 Identification bytes bytes Activate serial option box NOT activated Activation of RTS CTS hand RTS CTS Don t shaking in the IEC activate serial communication e g for driving RTS CTS the modem carrier RTS leading time ms 1to 255 1 Overlapping of RTS signal be fore the telegram RTS trailing time ms 1to 255 1 Overlapping of RTS signal after the telegram
118. SCADA Advanced tree branch for Settings SCADA contains complete DNP3 specific communica tion settings Interface settings DNP3 receiver inverted Oo DNP3 transmitter inverted Al DNP3 RS485 activated DNP3 fiber optics activated CH DNP3 RS232 used Baud rate of serial port DNP3 Bd 9600 v ON time of serial LEDs 10ms j Protocol settings Link address of REG P 103 Link address of DNP3 master 1 Inter character timeout Fosc 12 sooo Timeout after interchar ms 10 Time till reset 10ms 100 Number of TSDU fragments 1 Size of each TSDU fragment byte 29 0 Using confirmation for EVENT response Fj Timeout for receiving AL confirmation 10ms s0 Number of repetitions after AL confirm timeout Timeout select operate function 10ms soo Event queue size 256 Figure 67 Advanced Settings SCADA for REG P TK509 TK400 Page 132 DNP3 settings REG P a eberle A Table 46 DNP3 Settings SCADA REG P TK509 TK400 Setting Format Range Default Description DNP3 receiver checkbox unchecked DNP3 receiver inverted without inverted jumpers DNP3 transmitter checkbox unchecked DNP3 transmitter inverted inverted DNP3 RS485 ter checkbox unchecked DNP3 RS485 terminator activat minator activated ed DNP3 RS485 acti radio button unchecked DNP3 RS485 activated vated DNP3 fiber optics radio button unche
119. Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 IEC103 Device x Indications PQI D ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeses 107 IEC103 Device x Data points indications FORD 109 IEC103 Device x Data points commande 110 IEC103 Device x Fault records FORD 111 Channel ffset tenm ea need 114 IECIOA Settings nA een aar apee eaaa dea tal ech esadetevesteveesaradvees Terre 117 IECTO4 Settings SCADA i ee ee ee ee en einer agb 119 JECIOA CHoMServer settings ee ea nad 120 IECTO4 Supervis ry settings anna Bene a a 124 IEC1OA tIME amp synchr nization aan aa S 126 IEC104 Device communication settings ccccccccccccccccececececeseceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeess 126 IEC104 commands u uu usa EE 127 IEC104indications uuaesen ee ea Rear 128 DNP3 basic settings REG P 131 DNP3 Settings SCADA REG P TK509 TKaA00 133 DNP3 Settings SCADA REG PITKGSIZ 135 DNP3 device settings RES Regeerung ee ee 136 WIER eil EI EE 137 DNP3 ndications REG Pr u u 0er ei 138 DNP3 basic settings REG PE D cc cccccssscccesssccesecsseceseesseceeecseeeececsaecececsaeeeseesaeeeeeeaeeeseea 139 DNP3 advanced settings REG DEID 141 DNP3 device settings REG PED 142 DNP3 indications REG PE D ccccccccccssscecee
120. UEXTV4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC101 unbalanced 25 01 2011 asciireg101UINTV4215 hex Version 42 15 IEC103 03 03 2010 asciireg103_EXTV4211 hex Version 42 11 IEC103 10 03 2010 asciireg103_INTV4211 hex Version 42 11 DNP3 02 10 2012 DNP3EXT hex DNP3 02 10 2012 DNP3INT hex REG P version TK400 IEC101 balanced 25 01 2011 ASCIIReg101B400V5213 hex Version 52 13 IEC101 unbalanced 25 01 2011 ASCIIReg101U400V5213 hex Version 52 13 IEC103 12 01 2012 ASCIIReg103_400V5216 hex Version 52 16 DNP3 23 07 2012 DNP3 hex CSO 16 11 2009 CSOv6007 hex Version 60 07 PQI DA TK400 CSO 16 11 2009 CSOv6007 hex Version 60 07 4 Introduction This document describes the configuration of telecontrol boards REG P REG PE REG PED PQI DA using DNP3 IEC101 IEC103 IEC104 Modbus 61850 C37 118 and Ethernet COM in connection with XXXSysTM devices e g REGSys or EORSys devices of a eberle compa ny To understand the ideas and techniques described you should already be familiar with general concepts concerning the above stated protocols and serial communication settings Introduction Page 13 We take care of it Page 14 6 1 Two methods of configuration may be used either online with connection to the REG PE REG PED or offline using a PC tool called WinConfig Tools The web server is a permanent part of the firmware of the REG PE REG PED devices and requires no special installation Web se
121. a eberle AA Instruction Manual REG PED sy REG PED We take care of it Author Department Changes Version Date Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Initial release 0 1 15 02 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Revision of all chapters 0 2 05 03 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Revision of pictures 0 3 19 03 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Revision of pictures FW 0 4 25 03 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Addition of MODBUS 0 5 10 04 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de MODBUS modifications 0 6 18 05 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Various modifications 0 7 29 06 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Various modifications 0 8 12 08 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Various modifications 0 9 16 09 2009 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Release version 1 0 29 01 2010 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Addition of IEC103 REG PE D 1 1 10 05 2010 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Various modifications 1 2 20 08 2010 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de DNP3 REG PE D over Ethernet 1 3 19 10 2010 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de IEC104 with 5 partner stations 1 4 14 02 2011 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borc
122. ached yet simple mechanism for time syn tion boxes device chronization schemes for attached devices There are three strategy types all devices only device device list and DCF77 The all devices scheme allows for a synchronizing of the all devices in E LAN or per Time Bus The only device scheme allows for a time synchronization of the only first device In standard settings a first device is master in E LAN The device list scheme allows for a specific time synchronization of the devices specified in the List of the synchronized devices fields Each field specifies the a Eberle ID device The DCF77 scheme the firmware sends DCF77 time to device which can be set in 3 modes The REG L time synchronization command via COM2 is not used here DCF77 device modes Page 247 We take care of it Page 248 Setting Format Range Default Description SINGLE via COM1 2 can be synchro nized the system time in the DCF mode The time synchronization bus is not supported SLAVE the time synchronization bus synchronizes the device system time MASTER device receives the time via COM1 in the DCF mode the DCF signal is switched directly to the synchroniza tion bus Otherwise the device sends his system time as DCF telegram via the synchronization bus Sync period of min 1t0 65535 5 The parameter determines an interval connected devic time between the sequential time es synchronizations by NTP se
123. acter timeout ms Timeout after command reception ms First character timeout ms Se function IEC address of error multipoint A Lee information number function IEC address of reset command p information number po Compatibility byte 8 Identification string Cause of transmission template LSA Max number of information elements of a channel NOE in Type 26 700 Transmission delay for ASDU Type 23 ms Mode of watchdog LED blinking v Figure 39 IEC103 settings SCADA for EOR D Interval between information elements INT in Type 23 us IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 85 We take care of it Page 86 Table 21 IEC103 settings SCADA for EOR D Setting Format Range Default Description Serial port Selection of val COM1 Selection of COM ports for ues in combo box IEC103 communication Baud rate of serial Bd Selection of val 38400 Baud rate of IEC103 serial port IEC ues in combo box port Parity Selection of val EVEN Selection of parity of IEC103 ues in combo box communication ON time of serial ms 1 to 100 10 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Link address of REG 1to 254 201 Link address in the given PE D range ASDU address 1to 254 201 ASDU address in the given range Inter character ms 2to 1000 20 Timeout between two char timeout acters Timeout after com Ms O to 65535 1500 Timeout after command mand reception recep
124. ailability Siemens 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D Sprecher 2x REG DP 1x No EOR D IEC103 Other REG D Yes ABB REG D Yes Areva REG D Yes DB REG D No IDS REG D No Mauell REG D Yes NRM REG D No SAT REG D Yes Siemens REG D Yes Sprecher REG D Yes IEC103 Basic REG DP Yes ABB REG DP Yes Areva REG DP Yes DB REG DP No IDS REG DP No Mauell REG DP No NRM REG DP No SAT REG DP Yes Siemens REG DP Yes Sprecher REG DP Yes IEC103 Basic EOR D Yes ABB EOR D No Areva EOR D No DB EOR D No IDS EOR D No Mauell EOR D No NRM EOR D No SAT EOR D No Siemens EOR D No Sprecher EOR D No IEC103 Basic 2x EOR D No ABB 2x EOR D No Areva 2x EOR D No DB 2x EOR D No IDS 2x EOR D No Mauell 2x EOR D No NRM 2x EOR D No WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle A Board Protocol Devices Template Note avallabilttv SAT 2x EOR D No Siemens 2x EOR D No Sprecher 2x EOR D No IEC103 Basic 3x EOR D No ABB 3x EOR D No Areva 3x EOR D No DB 3x EOR D No IDS 3x EOR D No Mauell 3x EOR D No NRM 3x EOR D No SAT 3x EOR D No Siemens 3x EOR D No Sprecher 3x EOR D No IEC103 Basic PQI D No ABB PQI D No Areva PQI D No DB PQI D No IDS PQI D No Mauell PQI D No NRM PQI D No SAT PQI D No Siemens PQI D No Sprecher PQI D No CSO Yes No SCADA or device spe cific data are applicable for CSO protocol CSO is not available
125. aint SP SG SE Setpoint Setting group Common Set Point Settings Pre Conditions Read Write Setting Read Write IEC Data Type FLOAT32 v Mapping in Poll String activate V Read Write Device Data Type FLOAT32 v Read Poll String Offset 132 Write Command co O Scale Scale in Write Command 0 Command rane RES EVALUE lll Ok Cancel sAddr Editor Functional constraint SP SG SE Setpoint Setting group Common Set Point Settings Pre Conditions Read Write Setting Read Write IEC Data Type BOOLEAN EA Mapping in Poll String activate V Read Write Device Data Type FLOAT32 X Read Poll String Offset 136 Write Command REGSW2 Command Behavior Type Binary command without space defaut 0 Example fvaue FALSE REGSW2 0 IEC61850 Page 181 We take care of it sAddr Editor Functional constraint SP SG SE Setpont Seting group _Common Set Point Settings J Condition No 1 Condition No 2 Condition No 3 Extended Settings Checked Data Point Type BIT_7 BYTE D Poll String Offset 3 Checked Value optional Minimal Setpoint Value optional Maximal Setpoint Value 0 optional Additional Cause Diagnosis recommended standard reium IEC61850 8 1 AddCause ICD Template sAddr Type PQIx850 Record Type ST Status Measurands Name Value name f sAd
126. al LEDs indicating LEDs activity on the IEC serial interface Link address of Oto 255 1 Link address displayed as word or REG P or set of two bytes The range is 0 to 65535 determined by the Link address size option ASDU address Oto 255 1 ASDU address displayed as word or or set of two bytes The range is 0 to 65535 determined by the ASDU address size option Link address size Selection 1 Size of link address in Bytes of values in combo box ASDU address Selection 2 Size of ASDU address in Bytes size of values in combo box Info address size Selection 3 Size of information address IOA of values in in Bytes combo box Use Don t use option box Use Usage of short single byte re single byte re sponses sponse Page 50 IEC101 settings a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Use single byte option box ACK Single byte response used for response for ACK NAK ACK Use single byte response for NAK Single byte re HEX 0 to FF E5 Value of single byte response sponse Use originator 0 option box NOT selected Usage of originator value 0 Max objects in 1 to 50 20 Max No of data objects in tele telegram gram Inter character ms 2 to 100 4 Timeout between two characters timeout in telegram Timeout after ms Oto 255 10 Timeout after Interchar timeout interchar expiration Time after TK105 10 ms 0 to 65535 100 Timeout after TK105 confirmation conf IEC address of 0 to 0 IEC a
127. al device is closed only by closing TCP Port Serial port Selection of COM2 Selection of serial port values in combo box Baud rate Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate values in combo box Parity Selection of Even Parity values in combo box Stop bits Selection of 1 Stop bits values in combo box Data bits Selection of 8 Data bits values in combo box XON XOFF Selection of No Option to select XON XOFF Page 120 IEC104 settings a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description values in handshaking combo box RTS CTS Selection of No Option to select RTS CTS hand values in shaking combo box RTS CTS inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RTS CTS signals combo box Rxd TxD inverted Selection of No Option to select inversion of values in RxD TxD signals combo box Interface type Selection of RS232 Option to select type of inter values in face combo box Max message length 0 to 65535 0 Max message length Tx blocking time ms 0 to 65535 0 Tx blocking time IEC104 settings Page 121 We take care of it 13 2 3 Supervisory settings The Supervisory settings tree branch can be used for activation and configuration of debug logs Page 122 IEC104 settings a eberle A Debug options Logging Type Level Deactivate w Trace Output Trace via FARAM connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottlenec
128. anges caused change 65535 by the command Value is configurable in the timeout range 0 65535 The default value is 8000 SBO unse ms 100 to 10000 Maximal waiting time of the Operate request lecting 65535 after receipt of a Select request Value is timeout configurable in the range 0 65535 The de fault value is 10000 Command text 64 charac empty Command that will be executed once after executed on ters startup startup Attached Devices Special device settings are valid for each individual attached device The default values must be adjusted to the respective device A complete data record describes an attached device Up to eight a Eberle devices can be attached This tree branch contains specific device settings Device Request Settings Identifier of device AA Poll string RPS 4 Size of answer byte 244 Type of seconds field INT32U ze Offset of seconds field byte 18 Type of msec field INT16U ze Offset of msec field byte 22 Comment REG D a Eberle Figure 163 IEC61850 Device x Advanced LDevice Instance in The parameter defines device identification by its number It must be the ICD file same as the IEC61850 Logical Device LD instance number e g logical device name REG2 must have value 2 for Device relocation Page 251 We take care of it Page 252 20 10 9 Table 100 IEC61850 Device x
129. are empty file named reboot and copy it in the xload new folder Wait approx 20s for the automatic restart of board e Installation of new XML settings and ICD file Prepare new settings file named settings xml and copy it in the xload new folder Prepare new ICD file if ICD change is required and copy it to the folder Prepare empty file named move and copy it Wait approx 20s for the automatic move and installation of the files Prepare empty file named reload and copy it Wait approx 20s for the automatic reload of files transferred in the previous sequence Reload can be used if there was change in the supervisory parame ters only Otherwise use restart see item 1 e Installation of new certificates Prepare device certificate in the cert pem file and copy in the xload new folder The certificate has to be in the PEM format Prepare and copy also the key as key pem file If required prepare and copy also the intermediate certificates as intercert pem file The certificates must be in PEM format and must be sorted starting with the certificate to the highest level root CA Alternatively the CA certificate can also be copied as the cacert pem file Prepare empty file named cert_move and copy it in the xload new folder Restart the board see item 1 WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED Page 21 We take care of it 6 3 4 SSH access SSH is used for remote access to console The file transfer is encrypted and protected
130. ase some settings regarding the SCL ICD file might have to be adjusted like the IED Server name for example This set ting can be done offline with WinConfig The naming of the ICD file is flexible The import ICD file with name xxx icd changes SCL name in parameter from current name to xxx icd Settings SCADA tree branch shows information concerning IEC61850 protocol and allows TCP configuration The button Export ICD file can be used for corresponding export and the button Edit ICD file runs the SCL Config for ICD file edit 1EC61850 a eberle A IEC61850 REG Dx1x61850 GOOOSE CS REG PE D SS Firmware ebe REGSYSxIEC61850 GOOSE COMServer REG PE D Firmware 133 5 ICD fie L zoet REG Dx1_120914_Std iod name Export ICD file Import ICD file Browse IL re _ Ethernet interfaces IEC GOOSE TCP configuration Configure TCP Keep alive interval a m Keep alive probes Keep alive time be Common behavior Enter Password to unlock Unkek Activate origin of Commands false File transfer Activate U Figure 156 IEC61850 Settings SCADA Table 94 1EC61850 Settings SCADA Setting Format Range Default Description Version of settings Version of settings read only Control version Control version number read only number Mode of watchdog Selection of Mode of watchdog LED blinking or LED values in switch off IEC61850 Pag
131. ata 12 1 4 Topical channel ACC The value from 1 up to 255 are supported 12 1 5 Fault Number FAN Page 76 IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 1 6 12 1 7 12 1 8 12 1 9 12 1 10 12 1 11 12 1 12 12 1 13 12 1 14 a eberle A FAN values are ranged from O up to 9999 If FAN amounts to 9999 the application sets next FAN to zero Interval between information elements INT It defines the interval for acquisition of the single information elements is the same for all disturbance data It is listed in microseconds Its values can be set in general IEC settings as Interval for acquisition in TI26 microsec ond Compatibility level COL The compatibility level of protection equipment based on the Compatibility byte setting See figure below It defined according to on this companion standard and preset to 1 Number of channels NOC The value is set to 8 and is constant for EOR D Number of information elements of a channel NOE All channels contain the same number of information elements This number is transmitted in ASDU 26 ready for transmission of disturbance data and set to 2048 for EOR D by de fault This setting can be changed in lEC settings pane Number of tags NOT The transmission of tag not supported NOT is preset to 0 as constant Number of relevant disturbance values per ASDU NDV NDV equals 25 for all disturbance channels Return information identifier RII
132. ata structure Cancel Cancel can be omitted if cancel ser vice is unsupported 4 SBO with enhanced security requires mandatory Data structure SBOw mandatory Data structure Oper and optional Data structure Cancel Cancel can be omitted if cancel ser vice is unsupported 5 Direct with enhanced security requires mandatory Data structure Oper and optional Data structure Cancel Cancel can be omitted if cancel service is unsupported Can be searched several types In this case user can select from choose one If sbo type is selected the user is able to edit sboTimeout and sboClass DAs After a confirmation a program changes a type of DO and brings all DAs conformably with selected DO type fig 29 amp 30 Page 187 We take care of it Properties IED Project Era in template Ki ba EE Name Yalue HAP DON RegU2Act a name ctIMadel valKind Set S ri el sale Val sbo with enhanced security EI Z DOI TapChgDown 94 DOI TapChgUp 94r DON UnUnv OZP DON BOSw4 HR DON BOSw3 Control Model Editor a ig DON BOSw2 Common 2 94 DON BOSW Control Model sbo with enhanced security a ig DON YrtCmdD1 sbo Timeout 30000 sbo Class operate once DAI stal Tere SDI Oper DAI sboTimeout Age DOI VrtCmd02 Information DO Type Id Figure 113 New attributes for selected sbo control model
133. ation between TK400 and TK517 boards in both directions can be performed First step of migration and INI file conversion implemented in WinConfig is to check for completion and correctness of settings data This has to be done due to some hardware dif ferences that exist between some REG P boards The Missing incorrect values page provides user interaction possibility during the check process and default values are suggested for changing and confirmation Missing incorrect values Setting name old value new value IEC101 Reject commands with unknown address notfound Use originator 0 notfound Time synchronization settings Synchronize devices by REG P not found Synchronize all devices connected to ELAN not found Figure 15 Missing incorrect values Checking of entered values Standard WinConfig pages containing textboxes checkboxes selections etc perform online initial internal checking of values entered in each textbox The check runs when user leaves the textbox Entered values are checked for valid limits If limits are broken the last or de fault value is automatically entered and text box is marked by red color Correctly entered values are also marked their label color is changed to red User cannot leave the page without confirmation or resetting of the changed values WinConfig pages containing tables values are organized in tabular format e g indications commands also contain online internal checking o
134. ay be composed of keywords types and values The character un so S a delimiter between the separate keywords types or values The three possible keyword groups are Table 77 Keyword Description Keyword group for definition the position in poll string Off offset in poll string Values range Bit bit offset begin with offset in poll string it is applied only for binary or for Boolean types Page 200 1EC61850 a eberle A Table 78 Keyword group for event type definition Keyword Description Values range Bool Boolean or binary type 0 1 Char Character or signed character type 128 127 Byte Unsigned character type 0 255 Unt16 Unsigned two bytes or unsigned short 0 65535 Word Signed two bytes or Signed short 32768 32767 ULong Unsigned four bytes or unsigned long 0 0xFFFFFFFF Long Signed four bytes or signed long OX7FFFFFFF 0x7 FFFFFFF Float IEEE 754 floating point bytes Table 79 Keyword group for definition the directed behavior in directional protection activation information ACD Keyword Description Values range Back Backward from IEC61850 enumeration dir Without value For Forward from IEC61850 enumeration dir Without value Both Both from IEC61850 enumeration dir Without value Table 80 Keywords group for definition complex data object behavior Keyword Description Values range Clear Event clears the
135. behavior in directional protection activation agedeelt KEE 201 Table 80 Keywords group for definition complex data object behavior cccssscccceeesessssteeeeeeeees 201 Table 81 Control value settings ccccscccccccessssesssaeeeeecesseseeaeseeeeecesseaaeaeeeeecesseseaseaeesesesssuseaaeaeeeeeens 204 Table 82 Boolean conversion rules for command convert cthvoall 206 Table 83 Double Point conversion rules for Ieommondlleconvertictfvoll 209 Table 84 Multi command control value settings cccccsessscccececeesesesececececeseesseaeeeeeeseessessaeaeesenens 210 Table 85 Predicable Condition Extended Setting 212 Table 86 Single command Set point settings 214 Table 87 Settings of GOOSE obt 219 Table 88 GOOSE subscribed stream settinge 224 Table 89 External GOOSE lightobject setting s 226 Table 90 Boolean conversion rules for GOOSE commande 229 Table 91 Double Point conversion rules for GOOSE commande 229 Table 92 IEC61850 Basie Settings geriet ed ee eg 232 Table 93 JEC61850 Serial Ports Settings un 233 Table 94 1EC61850 Settings SCADA ann uk ns 235 Table 95 ELAN extension over Ethernet CP 238 Table 96 IEC61850 COM Server unassessssesnnsnssssnsnssennanssennnkksseinnanssssnhhasns aaisen ais aundiakin 241 Table 97 IEC61850 Supervisory settings ccccssssccccecessesssnececeeecessesesaeaeeececesseseaseseeeeeeesseseaaeaeeeeeens 244 Table 98 IEC61850 Time svpnchronizaton 247 Table 99
136. berie device and activate the data transfer mode of a the eberle device deactivate supply voltage _ and keep the F1 button pressed while ea oz Functionality and user actions of data transfer of settings and firmware to REG P telecon trol board are similar to Manual data transfer which can be found in Advanced mode as described in chapter 8 2 4 WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 269 We take care of it 7 Download Transfer to communication system Transfer mode Serial Ethernet Transmission protocol Transmission protocol is set to HTTP Set HTTPS Set HTTP HTTPS protocol is recommended for improved security of data transfers Available board services Enable www pages VI Unlock UBoot Mi Enable SSH SFTP Mi Unlock Console Mi Set For more information about board services see tooltips Detect on LAN Firmware type Version of Device IP version settings date address SEH 7 Download Transfer to communication system TU T AS UVA AU de SEI Les See LUID Detect on LAN c Firmware type Version of Device IP type version settings date address Operation Progress M Status Finished Activity Completed detecting devices Transfer from PC to Device C Telecontrol board IP settings Steps to transfer settings IP address 10 1 10 197 1 Detect board on LAN Subnet 2 Select board in the table mask 3 Transfer from PC
137. ce settings EOR D 105 IEC103 Device x Indications PQI D cccccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneseneeeneeeneeens 107 IEC103 Device x Indications EOR D 109 IEC103 Device x Commands u er shiveceedati cate caavcecesed chee seicceceteliseces 110 IEC103 Device x Fault records FORD 111 Read Faults Record from FORD 112 IEC104 basic Settings c cccccccssssssssecececscsssescaecececeseesecaeaeeesecsssuseuseaeeeeeseseeseuaeeeeeessessenenaeess 116 IEC104 Settings SCADA sn ea aa 118 IEC10A ComServer Settings eege sea EE NEEN EEN 120 JEC104 Supervisory settings denne ann ekleakiensie Gaateeateceehens 123 IEC104 Linked devices une I en 125 IEC104 time synchronization settings ccccccccccessssessaeeececessessseeeeeescesseuseeeeeessessesesaees 125 Internal communication settings cecesesssssecececeeseseseeeceeecessesesaececeeecessesesaeeeeeeseessesesaeens 126 IEC104 commands u u re araa AN N AS SEN AEE E NN 127 IEC104 indications uun nean a na a eh Ea 128 DNP3 basic settings REG P an a a 131 Advanced Settings SCADA for REG P TK509 TK400 ccscccceessececessseceeseseeeeessaeeeessaaes 132 Advanced Settings SCADA for REG P TK517 cccccccsssscecessseeeeeesseeecesaeeeesssaeeeesssaeeeeseaaes 134 DNP3 device request settings REG P 136 DNP commands REG P u n 2 ne een nenn ar 137 DNP3 indieations REG P u a a Ra ea 138 DNP3 basic settings REG PEID a
138. changing of device settings only Timeout of REG P 10ms 1to 255 200 Timeout of REG P responses responses Inter character ms 1 to 255 70 Timeout between two charac timeout ters in device communication Time to wait after ms O to 255 0 Timeout after message recep REG P response tion CSO settings REG P Page 147 We take care of it 17 CSO settings REG PE D 17 1 CSO channels COM Server Enter Password to Extend Inactivity timeout O Activate Connection type IP address TCP port s Baud rate XON XOFF RTS CTS o Yes wl Socket 0 0 0 0 ena jo 115200 ve sl No UI wes v Socket 0 0 00 5002 lo 115200 u Ye v No Yes Socket 0 0 0 0 5003 o 115200 es wl No Yes wi Socket 0 0 0 0 5006 0 115200 v No wl ys w Figure 78 CSO channels REG PE D Table 57 CSO settings REG PE D Channels Setting Format Range Default Description Disabled Yes No No Option to disable the channel State Selection of RAW State of channel values in OFF disables the port from accepting connec combo box tions It can be turned on later RAW enables the port and transfers all data as is between the port and the device RAWLP enables the port and transfers all input data to device device is open without any POSIX setting or directly TELNET enables the port and ru
139. cific NTP primary server IP address 192 168 1 140 NTP secondary server IP address 192 168 1 5 Figure 154 IEC61850 Basic Settings IEC61850 Page 231 We take care of it Page 232 Table 92 IEC61850 Basic Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Identification Text 64 charac Identification Identification string of open string ters string of open settings settings IED name Text 10 charac IED name de IED Intelligent Electronic ters fined in settings Device name defined in set tings capital letters only Description Text 64 charac User description User description ters defined in set tings Identifier of de 3 characters defaults defined Identifier of device as appears vice in the Devices in the device communication tree branch NTP primary serv 4x 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 NTP primary server IP address er IP address NTP secondary 4x 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 NTP secondary server IP ad server IP address dress IEC61850 20 10 Advanced 20 10 1 Serial ports assignment IEC61850 a eberle A The Serial ports assignment tree branch is tool for management of telecontrol board serial ports The serial ports available in telecontrol board are well arranged in table together with the information about their usage in protocols and COM Server channels The page contains also internal checks to avoid conflicts in usage of COM ports At the same time the table also allows
140. cked will be set the ob activate ject will be passed for GOOSE command Logical Device string Upto A It defines aname of Logical Device IEC 61850 in for command 64 Structure Server The GOOSE command will be sym applied for defined device only Thename must bols contain no white space The naming rules con form to IEC61850 part 6 Data Type list GE BOOLEAN It defines the IEC61850 data type For example it INTI6 has been marked on the screenshot above INT16U P INT32 All possible choices are listed in the drop down INT32U list DOUBLEPOIN For example ENUM i GOOSE bit string 10 can be executed as double point 2 command Maximal float 1 Nowadays it isn t supported for GOOSE com Value ex mands The parameter is leaved only for SP DC compatibility with the previous versions Scale dec 0 The parameter defines scale of command value 128 1 Normally scale is used as exponent with single 27 commands If a Boolean or Bitstring IEC control data type is selected scale has special meaning See following tables The parameter can be adjusted from 127 128 By default set to 0 Behavior and types of scale shown below Page 227 We take care of it Page 228 Name Command Unit string Range Standard REG L com mand value B20 Description Command string according to RGL settings of REG D Data Quality order list Values are listed in the pull down l
141. cked DNP3 fiber optics activated activated DNP3 RS232 used radio button checked DNP3 RS232 used Baud rate of serial Bd selection of 9600 Baud rate of serial port DNP port DNP3 values in combo box ON time of serial 10 ms 1to 255 4 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Link address of 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG P REG P Link address of 0 to 65535 1 Link address of DNP master DNP3 master Inter character Fosc 12 1000 to 18000 Timeout between two charac timeout 65535 ters in telegram Timeout after ms Oto 255 0 Timeout after inter character interchar timeout expiration Time till reset 10 ms 1to 65535 100 Time until reset after cold re start Number of TSDU 1to 128 1 Number of TSDU fragments fragments Size of each TSDU 249 2048 249 Size of each TSDU fragment fragment Using confirma checkbox unchecked Using confirmation for EVENT tion for EVENT response response Timeout for re 10 ms 1 to 65535 80 Timeout for receiving AL con ceiving AL firmation confirmation Number of repeti 0 to 255 1 Number repetitions after AL tions after AL confirm timeout confirm timeout Timeout se 10 ms 1 to 65535 500 Timeout select operate func lect operate tion function Event queue size 10 to 1024 256 Event queue size DNP3 settings REG P Page 133 We take care of it Interface settings Telecontrol board designation TK517 FL4 EI DNP3 receiver inverted Fj DNP3 transmitter inverted Fj DNP3 RS485 terminator a
142. ction for comparison of the settings currently selected in WinConfig and settings in the telecontrol board The results of com parison are presented in the Microsoft Excel workbook 9 2 11 Change of IP settings for REG PE D telecontrol boards To change IP settings for telecontrol board type TK8xx click the Change board IP settings button that appears on the screen when successful detection of a TK8xx board on LAN is performed and the particular board selected The detection can be done before the data transfer either from or to PC The IP settings of the REG PE D telecontrol board are proto col independent The following window appears on screen REG PE D board IP settings Set IP settings to telecontrol board Board type REG PED TK885 Board name TK385 Use PRP V1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol Use Ethernet interfaces bonding Broadcast Use Ethernet interfaces independently Ethernet interface MAC 00D09322DF32 IP address 10 1 10 196 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP address 10 1 10 1 i Operation Status Activity Go to Transfer to PC page Figure 11 REG PE D board IP settings Page 40 Work with protocol settings 9 2 12 a eberle Enter new values and click the Set button to change IP settings of Ethernet interfaces If you want to prevent Ethernet interface fail click the Use Ethernet interfaces bonding op tion box to bond Ethernet interfaces and to u
143. ctivated 7 DNP3 RS485 activated O DNP3 fiber optics activated O DNP3 RS232 used Baud rate of serial port DNP3 Bd 9600 EY ON time of serial LEDs 10ms Protocol settings Link address of REG P Link address of DNP3 master 1 Inter character timeout Fosc 12 Timeout after interchar ms Time till reset 10ms Number of TSDU fragments hb Size of each TSDU fragment byte Using confirmation for EVENT response Fi Timeout select operate function 10ms Event queue size Figure 68 Advanced Settings SCADA for REG P TK517 Page 134 DNP3 settings REG P a eberle A Table 47 DNP3 Settings SCADA REG P TK517 Setting Format Range Default Description Telecontrol board selection of TK517 FL4 Selection from 4 available board designation values in types to get correct version of combo box firmware DNP3 receiver checkbox unchecked DNP3 receiver inverted option inverted for board without jumpers checkbox unchecked DNP3 transmitter inverted DNP3 transmitter n i e option for board without jump inverted ers DNP3 RS485 ter checkbox unchecked DNP3 R5485 terminator activat ed option for board without minator activated jumpers DNP3 RS485 acti radio button unchecked DNP3 RS485 activated option vated for board without jumpers DNP3 fiber optics radio button unchecked DNP3 fiber optics activated option for board
144. d 0 a paaa Desdbundesimaten percentage devon ag DO BOSw3 Figure 132 Status Data mapped in device data IEC Data point REGD1 LLNO Mod is not mapped in internal device data only for example The interface changes versus the setting of Data mapping in device set or cleared For example in REGSys documentation displayed OpCntRs data attribute is described as follow OFFSET IEC 61850 object REG D DA measured unit REG Data type RPS A LN ATCC1 Attr mag f Common Tap counter 1 double word 96 OpCntRs OptCntRs data object is mapped in data of the device and can be imaged in other outside tool or program However not mapped Mod data attribute is displayed as follows S LN ATCC ATCC 1 Gu DOI Mod amp DAN stVal m DAI ctlModel EIKE au fg DOI Beh sAddr Editor Ag DOI Health i j i Status Measurands Go DON Loc Functional constraint ST MX La DAN stVal Common Settings GOOSE light DPS Events 2 DO OpCntRs Generic Settings o og DOI TapChg IEC61850 Data Type ENUM sl E DOI ParOp o u DON LTCBK EIER num z 0 94 DON CV A az DOI LodA Figure 133 Status Data Point not mapped in device data IEC61850 Page 199 We take care of it Table 76 Status Data Configuration Data Form entry Description Common IEC61850 Data Type Defines the corresponding IEC data type Mapping in Poll String activa
145. d as typi TK400 cal configuration not related to particular SCADA producer Basic REG DP No IEC101 Basic REG D Yes ABB REG D Yes Areva REG D No IDS REG D Yes SAT REG D Yes Siemens REG D No Sprecher REG D No IEC101 Basic REG DP Yes ABB REG DP No Areva REG DP No IDS REG DP Yes SAT REG DP No Siemens REG DP No Sprecher REG DP No IEC101 Basic EOR D Yes ABB EOR D No Areva EOR D No IDS EOR D No SAT EOR D No Siemens EOR D No Sprecher EOR D No IEC101 Basic 2x REG D Yes ABB 2x REG D No Areva 2x REG D No IDS 2x REG D No SAT 2x REG D No Siemens 2x REG D No Sprecher 2x REG D No IEC101 Basic 3x REG D Yes WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 255 We take care of it Page 256 Board Protocol Devices Template Note availability ABB 3x REG D No Areva 3x REG D No IDS 3x REG D No SAT 3x REG D No Siemens 3x REG D No Sprecher 3x REG D No IEC101 Basic 4x REG D Yes ABB 4x REG D No Areva 4x REG D No IDS 4x REG D No SAT 4x REG D No Siemens 4x REG D No Sprecher 4x REG D No IEC101 Basic 2x REG DP Yes ABB 2x REG DP No Areva 2x REG DP No IDS 2x REG DP No SAT 2x REG DP No Siemens 2x REG DP No Sprecher 2x REG DP No IEC101 Basic 4x REG DP Yes ABB 4x REG DP No Areva 4x REG DP No IDS 4x REG DP No SAT 4x REG DP No Siemens 4x REG DP No Sprecher 4x REG DP No IEC101 Basic REG D REG
146. d step is intended for transfer of created settings and corresponding firmware to the telecontrol board The appearance of the Download page differs according to the avail able data transfer possibilities of individual board and necessary settings 6 Download Transfer to communication system Transfer mode Serial Ethernet Please select your PC serial port serial port number 1 Operation Progress 0 Status Activity Transfer from PC to Device NOTE Put the device in loader mode according to the manual press reset button of telecontrol board wait cca 30s after restart for TK400 REG P type and click the Transfer from PC to Device button Figure 174 Download REG P Quick help Telecontrol board TK400 Ethernet data transfer Click the Download from PC to Device button and reset the telecontrol board afterwards Telecontrol board TK8xx Ethernet data transfer With the help of Detect on LAN all available devices of the pre selected telecontrol board are searched in the local network After selecting the fitting device from the given list the file transfer can be started by pressing the Download from PC to Device button In case of using a TK885 REG PED please make sure to select the primary Ethernet interface indicated by the IP address Telecontrol board TK509 TK517 TK400 serial data transfer Please connect the original A Eberle zero modem cable to the COM1 of the e
147. ddress hi mi lo or identification of information in 3x 0 to 255 IEC telegram Control code selection of val TI45 Information object type control ues in combo box code Command string text 50 chars empty Command string Scale exponent selection of val 0 Scale exponent ues in combo box 100 value decimal O to 65535 0 100 value available for T148 only Description text 48 chars empty User description Columns to hide Disabled Information object address IOA IOA hi milo Control code Command sting RegSystype Scale exponent Description Rows count 35 Count of selected rows 0 7 Disaniea patent tent IOA hi mi lo 4 ZE Command string 4 ee a Sca CR Now 11521 o ilas Lasel B2o eooL elen v Dn si 11522 o as l2 asi Jo eooL elen s gees 1 Ps 1 P mi m 1 _ es ss 1 Figure 31 IEC101 Commands REG PE D Table 15 IEC101 Commands REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description IEC101 settings 10 4 4 a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Disabled selection of val No Option to disable the command ues in combo box IOA IOA Oto 16777215 0 Information object address hi mi lo or identification of information in 3x0 to 255 IEC telegram Control code selection of val TI45 Information object type control ues in combo box code
148. ddress IOA of multipoint for error multipoint 16777215 errors O undefined or 3x Oto 255 Errors data type Selection TIL Data type for errors in IEC101 of values in communication combo box Balanced mode settings Balanced specific Use balanced mode Use unbalanced mode Direction bit Timeout for secondary ACK DH 0ms Max repeats of primary station tlg IAWD Use IAWD mode Dont use IAWD mode AT control string Dial string Time to wait for connection s Number of dial repeats Dial pause s Time to keep connection open s Figure 18 Balanced mode settings IEC101 settings Page 51 We take care of it Table 4 IEC101 balanced mode settings Setting Format Range Default Description Use balanced option box unbalanced Selection of IEC101 mode mode Use un balanced mode Direction bit selection of 0 Direction bit values in combo box Timeout for sec 10 ms 1 to 255 20 Timeout for secondary ACK ondary ACK Max repeats of 1to 255 4 Max No of repeats of primary primary station station telegram telegram Use IAWD mode option box Don t use IAWD mode selection Don t use IAWD mode AT control string text 80 charac empty AT control string ters Dial string text 20 charac empty Dial string ters Time to wait for S 1 to 60 1 Time to wait for connection connection Nu
149. ddress of reset command emacs p information number po Compatibility byte 18 Identification string Interval between information elements INT in Type 22 us Max number of information elements of a channel NOE in Type 26 Transmission delay for ASDU Type 23 ms Mode of watchdog LED blinking Test Mode Test Mode activated activated via Command Type 20 M Binary Input for Test Mode switching 15 Test Mode command func type Test Mode command info number RB O9 Figure 38 IEC103 settings SCADA for PQI D IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 81 We take care of it Table 20 IEC103 settings SCADA PQI D Setting For Range Default Description mat Serial port Selection COM1 Selection of COM ports for IEC103 com of values munication in combo box Baud rate of Bd Selection 38400 Baud rate of IEC103 serial port serial port IEC of values in combo box Parity Selection EVEN Selection of parity of IEC103 communica of values tion Conforming to the IEC 60870 5 103 in combo standard the program sets the default box byte parity to even sets the number of data bits to 8 and the number of stop bits to 1 ON time of serial ms 1 to 100 10 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Link address of 1 to 254 201 Enter the address field for link layer IEC REG PE D 60870 5 2 Frame 1 2 Address must be unique within a shared line or it may be unique within a group of links sharing a common channel
150. defined in the version 10 coded by XOR remain in the upgraded version 11 The individual account is changed to the new SHA2 coding version in the mo ment when user changes this account in the WinConfig 11 The file with SHA2 coded accounts remains in the telecontrol board when downgrading from version 11 to version 10 Offline WinConfig 10 using XOR password coding will not work in such case To solve such situation the user can change the accounts using FTP or serial PARAM port or to delete the account file mnt jffs2 config webs_users conf When the file is deleted the default account will be used Rules for higher security It is strongly recommended to switch off at least the online WinConfig and change the fac tory default passwords to get highest security concerning data and software stored in telecontrol board User should also disable all network services that are not necessary for the board operation and management namely SFTP SSH and HTTPS WinConfig When creating new user password keep also in mind the basic rules for secure passwords e Password should be at least 8 characters long e Use uppercase and lowercase letters e Use also numbers e Use also special characters like S amp For more information about secure and strong passwords please consult the publicly avail able information in the Internet SFTP access A SFTP SSH file transfer protocol client program has to be used for connection with tele control boa
151. disables the port from accepting connections It can be turned on later Socket enables the port and trans fers all data as is between the port and the device Serial direct enables the port and transfers all input data to device device is open without any POSIX setting or directly Telnet enables the port and runs the telnet protocol on the port to set up telnet settings This is most useful for using telnet IP address 4x 0 to 255 IP address TCP port 0 to 65535 3003 TCP port Inactivity S 180 Inactivity timeout timeout Serial port Selection of values Serial port read only To change in combo box serial port go to Serial ports assign ment tree branch Baud rate Bd Selection of values 115200 Baud rate in combo box Parity Selection of values None Parity read only in combo box Stop bits Selection of values 1 Stop bits in combo box XON XOFF Selection of values No XON XOFF handshaking in combo box RTS CTS Selection of values No RTS CTS handshaking in combo box RTS CTS Selection of values No RTS CTS inverted inverted in combo box Interface Selection of values RS232 Interface type RS232 RS485 type in combo box Max mes O to 65535 0 Max message length sage length Tx blocking ms 0 Tx blocking time time IEC61850 Page 241 We take care of it 20 10 5 Supervisory settings The Supervisory settings tree branch can be used for activation and configuration of debug logs Level
152. dr 2 53 53 3 74 0 001 0 uid 1173 sAddr Editor Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands Common Settings GOOSE Generic Settings IEC61850 Data Type FLOAT32 F Device Data Type FLOAT32 x Data Class PGI D 10 min interval CPR D 10 min interval X Mapping in Poll String activate Poll String Offset 74 Deadband 0 001 Deadband estimation Ok i Cancel Page 182 IEC61850 20 2 6 IEC61850 a eberle A sAddr Editor Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands Common Settings GOOSE light Advanced GOOSE and auxiliary Settings Using as Subscriber timeout eror alam F Number of the observed Subscriber if set as alarm Subscriber No 0 v sAddr Editor Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands Common Settings GOOSE light Advanced Behaviour as Event Settings Auxiliary Group Group 0 z Extended Syntax Settings uid 1173 Status Request optional ICD Template sAddr Type PQIx850 Record Types CO Control amp SP Set point Setting group are not supported Removing Data Objects Removing of DO is executed in two steps 1 when an user executes the function Remove DO in application verifications of name mandatory DO list for LPHD Logical Node PhyNam PhyHealth Proxy for other Mod Beh Health NamPlt A removing the DO is blocked if DO is sy
153. e 20 633 Multi Command Here the check box for Multi command is checked If it gets unchecked the mode will be changed to Single Command This mode is only available for Boolean and DoublePoint commands Multi command mode has been left for backward compatibility and will not be supported in future IEC61850 Page 209 We take care of it Common Settings Pre Condition s Acknowledgement Common Control Type IEC BOOLEAN 2 Multi Command activate F Multi Command Number of Commands 2 v Command No 1 Scale 0 Command aa q20 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Command No 2 Scale 0 Command Command2 Figure 136 Control Value Configurations Multi Command Multi commands are built as a chain of the comma separated commands For example commands No 1 and No 2 create the multi command A regAUTO 1 aa q20 if regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Table 84 Multi command control value settings Common IEC type of control Defines the corresponding IEC control data type Multi Command The parameter defines using of the multi command CO data attribute activate Leave unchecked for single command Single command Scale Normally scale is used as exponent with single commands If a Boole an Double IEC control data type is selected scale has special meaning See following tables The parameter can be adjusted from 127 128
154. e 186 IEC61850 20 2 10 IEC61850 a eberle A Changing the control model for controllable data objects For Status only Data Objects a control model does not change Changing of DO Data Class is accessible for four control models Direct with normal security SBO with normal security SBO with enhanced security Direct with enhanced security Properties JED Project isintemplate Name Value e ur DON RegU2 amp ct A name ctlModel Hi valKind Ea sge DOI RegU1Act Val direct with normal security 947 DOI TapChgDown mz oi DO TapChaUp 947 DON Ununv Age DON BOSw4 ge DOI BOSw3 Control Model Editor ar DO BOSw2 Common 30 AS KA DOI BOSw1 Control Model sbo with enhanced security ge 2 DON V tCmdD1 se Q DAI stval sbo Timeout 30000 DAI ctlModel sbo Class operate once v SDI Oper E g DON itCmd02 Information Age DOI VrtCmd03 DO Type Id eg d StdSPCsbo x Age DON V tCmd04 Kee Er Figure 112 Changing the control model for controllable data objects User is able to select a control model from the drop down list Control Model The pro gram finds new DO type for selected model by algorithm 1 New DO type has the same Data Class 2 Direct with normal security requires mandatory Data structure Oper 3 SBO with normal security requires mandatory Data attribute SBO mandatory Data structure Oper and optional D
155. e 235 We take care of it Page 236 20 10 3 Setting Format Range Default Description combo box Firmware version Firmware version read only Firmware build Firmware build read only ICD file name ICD file name read only IEC Selection of EthO values in Selection of Ethernet combo box interface for IEC pro tocol GOOSE Selection of EthO values in Selection of Ethernet interface for combo box GOOSE Configure TCP checkbox unchecked Configure TCP Keep alive interval Selection of 3 Keep alive interval values in combo box Keep alive probes Selection of 4 Keep alive probes values in combo box Keep alive time Oto 20 15 Keep alive time Common behav textbox Password to unblock the following iour Password option Common behav Selection of false activate origin of commands iour activate origin values in of commands combo box File transfer Acti checkbox unchecked Activation of file transfer vate ELAN extension CSE The ELAN extension CSE tree branch can be used for activation and configuration of CSE 1EC61850 a eberle A ELAN extension over Eth CSE Version 1 07 00 build 2012 08 27 Activate CSE U Interface settings Serial port COM4 Baud rate of serial port Bd 115200 Parity None RTSICTS off XON XOFF off Listen port Interface ze Send ports Activate IPaddress Port Figure 157 ELA
156. e Default Description Identifier of de text AA or A 1 to AA Identifier of device as appears vice 9 to Z 1 to 4 in the device communication Poll string text 23 chars fread RPS 3 Device poll string Size of answer byte 1 to 255 244 Size of answer Offset of seconds byte O to 255 18 Offset of seconds field field Offset of msec byte Oto 255 22 Offset of msec field field Description string 30 characters Empty string User description DNP3 settings REG PE D 15 3 2 a eberle A Indications Indications r Columns to hide Description DNP3 object type RegSys type DNP3 obj index Static definitions Event definitions Event class Abs deviation Scal Confirm Reset Add Inset Delete Export Import Advanced Search Row count 105 Count of selected rows 0 S Description 4 kee E Ve Static definitions 4 _ Event definitions 4 O E EHe S See E IO Overflow Binary input v Figure 75 DNP3 indications REG PE D Table 54 DNP3 indications REG PE D 1 2 with status 1 2 with status V lt Lilftatus of Device 1 OK Binary input Ife Az witn status DJ Be time DEER Cl lt lt lt lt le HS with status ES with time lt Setting Format Range Default Description DNP3 object type selection of valuesin Binaryinput DNP3 object type combo box R
157. e device needs a unique Identifier The identifier always rancicte nf a laarlinn ranital letter an S am Guam contrmz2 Figure 172 Devices 8 REGSys configuration REGSys configuration step refers to the necessity of equal setting of communication config uration between telecontrol board and device User has to modify the device communication settings to match the given settings of telecontrol board The HANDSHAKE value reflects the version of telecontrol board WinConfig in Step by Step mode 21 8 a eberle Za 6 REGSys Config Please configure the attached REGSys A REG D P A 12 34 18 BAUDRATE PARITY HANDSHAKE Figure 173 REGSys configuration Download Quick help REGSys Configuration To ensure a valid communication between the telecontrol board and the attached a eberie device it s necessary to adjust the communications interface of both devices equal Therfore the necessary COM2 configuration of the a eberie device is given here according to the loaded configuration file Please make sure that the stored information inside the REGSys are equal to the given Please use the display interface in case of REG D REG DA and navigate to the menu lt MENU gt SETUP6 gt RS 232 gt COM 2 1 gt or in case of REG DP REG DPA to lt MENU gt SETUP gt System gt gt COM amp E LAN gt COM2 2 4 gt and check edit the parameter there according to the given figure Downloa
158. e down Round time up O Figure 23 Internal communication IEC101 for REG P Page 58 IEC101 settings 10 3 3 a eberle A Table8 Internal communication Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of device Bd selection of 115200 Baud rate of serial communi serial values in cation with device combo box ON time of serial LEDs 10 ms 1to 100 1 ON time of serial LEDs Timeout for reception of 10 ms 1to 255 50 Timeout for reception of first first char character Inter character timeout 10 ms 1to 255 20 Timeout between two charac ters in telegram Number of repeats for 1to 255 5 Number of repeats for SYNC SYNC cycle cycle Number of command 1to 255 2 Number of command poll repeats repeats TX blocking ms Oto 255 30 Time to wait when answer was received Timeout for analog cyclic 100 ms O to 650 0 Timeout for analog measure sending ments cyclic sending 0 disable Time to stop REG D A S Otto 650 0 Time to stop regulator interro interrogation gation after IEC communication break Round time down Option box Round Rounding time selection Round time up down For parameters of Internal communication in IEC101 for REG PE D see the EC103 for REG PE D chapter in this manual Converter Errors The Converter Errors table describes settings of error indications generated by telecontrol board Meaning of individual error bits is described in the table Multip
159. e request settings tree branch contains device specific settings Device Request Settings Identifier of device AA Poll type RPS v Poll string RPS 3 Size of answer byte 244 Offset of seconds field byte 18 Offset of msec field byte 22 L ess JL ss Figure 69 DNP3 device request settings REG P Table 48 DNP3 device settings REG P Setting Format Range Default Description Identifier of de text AA orA 1to AA Identifier of device as appears vice 9 to Z 1to in the device communication 4 Poll type selection of RPS Device poll type values in combo box Poll string text 23 chars RPS 3 Device poll string RPS specific Size byte 1to 255 244 Size of answer of answer RPS specific Off byte Oto 255 18 Offset of seconds field set of seconds field RPS specific Off byte Oto 255 22 Offset of msec field set of msec field Page 136 DNP3 settings REG P a eberle A 14 3 2 Commands Commands tree branch contains DNP specific settings for DNP protocol Columns to hide Outputtype DNP3obj index Control code Scale Command string Description Search Rows count 26 Count of selected rows 0 Oo Zeie KE Control code Scale a Command string Description v ene v ER v O Relay sei Trip Close x REGAUTO Auto Manual A O Reay 2 Operate on object v REGhoeher 1 Raise Tap O Reay v
160. e settings in the tree e g DNP3 on REG P TK400 lal Save save the selected settings to the XML file on local disk Compare comparison of settings in XML files with results stored in Microsoft Excel XLS file Export export of selected settings to a Microsoft Excel XLS file Transfer to PC transfer settings from a connected telecontrol board to WinConfig as described above e Transfer from PC transfer selected settings from WinConfig to the connected tele control board as described above Figure 4 Main menu buttons New settings To create new settings from an existing template please click new button Select board type protocol SCADA template and devices template from combo boxes shown below then click the Add button These newly created settings will appear in the settings tree The setting templates are divided into two editions in the case of IEC 61850 protocol The edition of template can be chosen in the Template edition listbox This listbox is disabled in the case of other protocols Work with protocol settings 9 2 2 a eberle A Add new settings Add new settings from template Board type REG PED j Protocol DNP3 v Template edition SCADA template Basic Gel Attached Eberle devices 1x REG D A Figure 5 Add new settings Predefined templates Valid workable combinations of board_type protocol SCADA_template Devic es_template are pre de
161. ecerdecs 266 Protocol selection REG P CSO i cccciiscaccceiscevacssanacasavasavacasacavacetacesaeasddacacatacavacuvaadsacebaneeaeds 266 Protocol selection DNP a eeh ae Edge DEE EENEG 267 List of Figures Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 28 Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 Table 31 a eberle Time synchronization u a 267 RI 268 REGSys configuration ereen e e EAE EE EE Eaa aE 269 Download REG une OAA O E ATOATOA OTAS 269 Download REG PE D honoriert eona eTA EAO NEET ONE 270 PIP IS IVS cees e eae ee ee reisen 271 List of Tables Topical software state at the 2013 10 10 11 IS ef RE On ln EC 48 Settings SCADA IEC101 u ae aa Re aan 50 IEC101 balanced m de settings u ee 52 IEC101 REG PE D Settings SCADA interface settings cccccccccssscesecsssceseesseeeeeesseeeeeees 54 IEC101 REG PE D Settings SCADA protocol settings ccccccccccssscesessseceeeesseceeeesseeeeeees 54 TK400 COM Server Setting 0 2 0 0r0480000r seaccenssatccccssnaceeceseaccdes aaa aaa aaia a aaa a Eaa 55 Internal communication Han lea 59 IEC101 device settings ui ein allein 60
162. ed Extended Trace for Common Extended Trace Functions General options checkbox unchecked Parse Settings Parse Settings General options checkbox unchecked General Warnings and Errors General Warnings General options checkbox unchecked General Events General Events General options checkbox unchecked Time Synchronization SNTP and Time Synchroniza Device tion General options checkbox unchecked Process Image Process Image General options checkbox unchecked Commands Execution Commands Exe cution Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Verbose output Verbose output Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Link layer log Link Layer Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Link State machine log Link State ma chine Eberle Device checkbox unchecked Application layer log Application Layer IEC103 Verbose checkbox unchecked Verbose output output IEC103 Link Layer checkbox unchecked Link layer log IEC103 Link State checkbox unchecked Link State machine log machine IEC103 Applica checkbox unchecked Application layer log tion Layer COM Server checkbox checked Protocol debug option activa Trace Activate tion trace Level Selection of user Option to select lever of super values in visory messages user combo box developer Trace via PARAM radio button checked Logging to PARAM Connector Connector Trace via TCP Port radio button unchecked Logging to TCP port
163. edgement condition defines a check behavior after command executing Extended Settings Check Behaviour Every Change Acknowledgement v Data Point Type INT32U P Poll String Offset Set Point optional 0 Figure 140 Acknowledgement Condition Settings Check Behavior Defines the estimation behavior Data Point Type Defines test data point type in poll string Poll String Offset Defines test data point offset in poll string Set Point optional Optional defines the test value For example O for reset command IEC61850 20 6 2 5 20 6 3 IEC61850 a eberle A Check Behaviour Data Point Type Every Change Acknowledgement Step Down Acknowledgement Poll String Offset Step Up Acknowled Same Command Value Acknowledgement Set Point optional Every Change Acknowledgement except Command Valus Setpoint Acknowledgement Figure 141 ACK NACK test behavior The check behaviors are same as in predicable condition However there is Setpoints condition which literal meaning same with name Control Model Parameter ctlModel specifies the control model of IEC 61850 7 2 that corresponds to the behavior of the data The configured value for ctlModel becomes effective as soon as the real device has been configured The values may be overwritten in Webserver if the condi tions and acknowledgment allow overwriting this value If a data instance of a control class has no status infor
164. eecsseeeaeceseeeaeeeseenaeess 218 Common Options TaD E 218 GOOSE Retransmission Settings Tab 219 GOOSE lightSubscribers pane s s nsnssessssnnesnssssrsenresrssssrrerrrssssssrrennnssssesrrennnsssseserennnssssenet 222 Add Subscriber from other ICD le 223 List of GOOSE lightexternal Input Objects 22220scssenennennsnnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnenonnnnnennnnennenenn 225 External GOOSE lightobject configuration ccecssssececeeeseesesaececeeecesseseaeeeeeeeesssesnsaeess 226 Se RER en de TC 231 IEC61850 Serial Ports Settings ueeeneennennenenennnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnennnnennnnenn 233 IEC61850 Settings TE 235 ELAN extension over Ethernet CEA 237 lEC61850 e el TT 240 IEC61850 COM Server Extended cccesccccsssccecesseneeceeseeeeceesenseceseeeeecssceeseceseeeaeesseenaeess 240 IEC61850 Supervisory settings ar a E S 243 IEC61850 Time svnchronlzation nennen 246 IEC61850 Internal COMMUNICATION ceeccessenceceeseececeeeeeeececeeeeecesseeeeceseeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeaaeess 249 IEC61850 DeviceX EE 251 Saving of settings in IEC61850 cccessccccccessesesseseceeecesseseaesecececessesesaeseeeescesseseaeaeeeeeens 252 Selection of hard Wale anne 254 Selection of protocol and templates cccccsessssecececessessnececeeecesseseeaeseeeeecesseseaeaeeeeeens 264 Se ART CN 265 Protocol selection REG P lECTO3 scicasacccagscacacesaaacdeabsnacdee anacccabanacdeasadacdeubacascuvasddacev
165. egATCC Control Block Description ATCC Specific DataSet Description GOOSE ATCC Specific Figure 148 Common Options Tab There are two Timing strategy types arithmetic and profile The arithmetic scheme has three parameters first interval multiplier and maximum inter val The first retransmission occurs after the first interval time Each subsequent interval is the product of the last interval times the multiplier until the maximum interval is reached Thus for first interval 400 multiplier 2 and maximum interval 3200 the retransmis sions will occur at intervals beginning at 2 and doubling each time until the maximum interval is reached 400 800 1600 3200 If any changes of GOOSE data occur the applica tion immediately sends GOOSE data and then resets the retransmission time to interval to first interval The profile scheme allows for a specific set of intervals to be specified Each interval speci fied in milliseconds is used in sequence of GOOSE light telegrams When the last specified interval has been used the parameters of the arithmetic scheme are then used for subse quent intervals including the maximum retransmission interval If any changes of GOOSE light data occur the application immediately sends GOOSE data and then resets the retransmission time to interval to first interval 1EC61850 a eberle A Terminal Autoloading GSE GOOSE activate GSE Control Blocks adjustment acti
166. el RAM disk or both Automatic firmware transfer or whether kernel and RAM disk will be transferred in any case Forced firmware transfer Selection of application case selection of the correct version of the REG PED board concerning usage of COM ports This selection affects the version of telecontrol board firmware User name user login for HTTPS access Password user password for HTTPS access Use last login values used last remembered login values Forget login values don t remember the entered login values Transmission protocol Set HTTPS use HTTPS protocol for data transfers to ensure security of trans ferred data Set HTTP use standard unsecured HTTP protocol Available board services Enable WWW pages Enable SSH SFTP Unlock UBoot Unlock Console options are dedicated to advanced user and allow to modify behaviour of telecontrol board to achieve security of data transfers by enabling disabling the cor responding services or by performing the indicated actions Change board IP settings this button switches to the REG PE D board IP settings page Run RPL this button runs the REG PEX loader configuration software that can be used to configure a REG PE D board in the case when the firmware on board is insufficient for the detection by WinConfig The usage of RPL requires serial connection between the PC and board being configured Submit certificates this button switches to the Submit certificates
167. en port Pot 13030 demm Send ports Activate IP address Port No v 193 168 58 1 13030 Yes v 193 168 58 3 13031 Yes 192 168 55 32 13032 Yes v 192 168 55 33 13033 Yes v 192 168 55 34 13034 Yes v 192 168 55 35 Yes v 192 168 55 36 13035 13036 Yes v 192 168 55 37 13037 Config uration of the second REG PED ELAN extension over Eth CSE Version 1 06 00 build 10 Activate CSE V Interface settings Serial port SOM Baud rate of serial port Bd 115200 Parity None Listen port Por 13031 C Send ports Hetivate Yes v Yes v Yes v Yes e Yes e Yes v Yes v IP address Port 193 168 58 1 13030 No 193 163 58 3 13031 5 192 168 55 32 13032 192 168 55 33 13033 192 168 55 34 13034 192 168 55 35 13035 192 168 55 36 13036 192 163 55 37 13037 Confirm Reset IEC61850 a eberle A IEC61850 Page 239 We take care of it Page 240 20 10 4 COM Server The COM Server tree branch can be used for activation and configuration of COM Server channels The table of COM Server channels shows basic parameters To show all channel parameters press the Extend button For changing the serial port number go to Serial ports assignment tree branch COM Server Rows count 10 Enter Password to Extena sid E Activate Connection type IP address
168. erface option This option is grayed out and not functional in the case for REG P telecontrol boards with jumpers Identifier of text 3 characters defaults de Device identifier string for device device fined in the protocol Devices tree branch IEC101 settings 10 2 Advanced 10 2 1 a eberle A IEC101 Settings SCADA for REG P telecontrol boards The Settings SCADA tree branch contains several board specific settings available for TK400 and TK517 telecontrol board types without jumpers and also contains a full range of IEC101 specific settings Interface settings IEC receiver inverted IEC transmitter inverted IEC RTS signal inverted IEC CTS signal inverted IEC RS485 activated IEC fiber optics activated IEC RS232 used Baud rate of serial port IEC Bd ON time of serial LEDs 10ms RTS CTS Activate serial RTS CTS Don t activate serial RTS CTS Protocol settings Link address of REG P ASDU address Link address size ASDU address size Info address size Use single byte response Don t use single byte response Use originator 0 Max objects in telegram Inter character timeout ms Timeout after interchar ms Time after T1105 conf 10ms IEC address of error multipoint Errors data type o000 8 Link lo ASDU hi P asDUb 1 Py _ A p o D 100 H Jeni Jip wb h TI u
169. erle de ee seet Semer ees FINA ick hel Hardware en The external module has a RJ45 Please select your hardware platform EE REG P TK400 connector at its Front Panel There are 3 LED columns with each 3 LEDs and an extra Watchdog LED overall 10 LEDs on its Front Panel external Version The REG DA Version of TK400 has also a RJ45 ETHERNET jack right next to the 7 LEDs ina single row The Device has no Flash memory module mounted via sockets REG P TK509 The external module has a 9 pin Sub D connector and two LED columns with each 4 LEDs overall 8 LEDs on its Front Panel Also the REG DA Version of TK509 has those 8 LEDs The Device has only one Flash memory module mounted via socket on the PCB printed circuit board REG P TK400 REG P TK400 for mounting in REG x REG P TK517 with mi gt Jumpers The external module has a 15 pin Sub D connector and two LED columns with each 4 LEDs overall 8 LEDs on its Front Panel nd a Figure 165 Selection of hardware WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle A 21 3 Protocol and templates The selection of protocol is performed in next step Available options are stated in the fol lowing table Table 101 Protocols and templates Board Protocol SCADA Devices Template availability TK509 DNP3 Basic REG D Yes Basic template type of TK517 SCADA is define
170. ert gehen ee AR EEEa 251 Saving of Settings in IEC61850 22 ee ea rien bel 252 WinConfig in Step by Step mode sssssscccssssceccssssseccessseccecssceccecssseccanssssseaesssseeaass 253 Templates in Step by Step mode nennen 253 hs pl ea EE 254 Protocol and templates cccsccssssececececesseseaecececessesecaeaeeececssseseaaeeeeeeecesseuaeeeseeseessesenaeess 255 geleet EE TC 265 Time SYNCHONIZATION nennen 267 NEE 268 REGSys configeuration ccccccecessssssseceeececesseeeaececececeeseaaeaecececessuseuseeeeesecessesauseaeseeseessesenaeess 268 BIS la Kor RE 269 Table of Contents 21 9 22 22 1 22 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 a eberle A N le 270 Tips n Troubleshooting Heeres essen 271 Common troubleshooting Ups 271 Diagnostic Functions in the Context of the REG P REG PE REG PED Device 272 Related Documentation uussssssssensennunsnnnnnnnnnennnonsnnnnnnnnnennnnnsnssnnnnnsennnnnanssnnnnnsennnn 275 Maintenance Cle ning 0u eeiiknkineleellsih Ellen 276 DIET TEE 276 Product Warranty ZBBRRPPERPREREFPEBERFPFERDEFEEFUEEENFEUEUPEFEEFUEEERFEFELBEREEFULEEFEEUEUEEEEEFUEEEEFEPEUPEFEEPEPBEREEER 276 List of TI 277 BEAT 281 Table of Contents Page 9 We take care of it 1 User Guidance 1 1 Warnings Types of warnings Warnings are distinguished according to the type of risk through the following signal words Danger warns of a risk of death Wa
171. erver the latest REG PE D type enables users to setup the telecontrol card for remote parameterization or retrieving data of REG D DA PQI D EOR D devices by WinReg software or for other programs which request data per Ethernet The most useful feature of COM Server is the supporting a shared serial channel mode for IEC control center as well as for WinPQ software at the same time The TCP IP access from WinPQ via COM Server allows a receiving online data POStart exe STD ID E Programme WinPQ NI Alex_Dimension DDF Files Programs Properties Help Q1 Trafo 10 k PQID UI E PQID UI P4 S Trafo 10KV 7 3 Eai A Recorder PQ events EI PO overview ki Measuring data EN EN reports issii Ei Read out data To Thresholds connection IO 2 Measuring parameter trigger SYS ID LAN Time EMS NW LIFE 12 01 08 Online read out and display of data Figure 40 Receiving Online Data from PQI D per shared channel COM Server IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 87 We take care of it a POPara EXE STD ID E Programme WinPQ MASK POParaVisu_13 DDF File Edit Help E PARAMETER TPQIPanOnIPanel C3s ID 2009 05 29 13 18 02 4975 RR 2691 ERR 0 NI 246463 AI A PD a eberie Aa EP QU PQI D PQI D 5 0 04 i Overview online graphic Offline table Memory allocation E Online graphic E Offline table Menu Stop C3s ID 2009 05 29 13 18 02 4975 RR 2691 ERR 0 NI 246463 AI 243778
172. es in Modbus communication combo box Baud rate of serial Bd Selection of 19200 Baud rate of Modbus serial port Bd values in combo box Parity Selection of Even Parity of Modbus serial port values in combo box ON time of serial ms 0 to 65535 20 ON time of serial LEDs indicating LEDs activity on the Modbus serial inter face Slave address 1 247 2 Address of slave RS 485 activated checkbox Not Activation of RS485 interface checked RTS CTS checkbox Not RTS CTS handshaking checked XON XOFF checkbox Not XON XOFF handshaking checked Response ms 2 to 100 5 SCADA response timeout timeout Turnaround delay ms 0 to 65535 250 Turnaround delay No reply O to 255 0 No reply Mode of watch Selection of blinking Mode of watchdog LED blink dog LED values in ing switched off combo box 18 4 Devices Devices tree branch is the same as for IEC101 protocol See chapter 9 2 18 4 1 Time synchronization Time synchronization tree branch is the same as for IEC104 protocol See chapter 11 2 2 Page 154 Modbus settings Internal communication settings a eberle A Device communication settings contain the following options Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd Parity ON time of serial LEDs ms Timeout for reception of first char ms Inter character timeout ms TX blocking ms Number of repests for SYNC cycle Number of poll repe
173. esccabsvesscasansecsasssesdoassnsssoaes 151 Basic settings MODBUSRIU ccc cecssssssssscsececeeeeaeaeaeaeseaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaaaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeanaes 151 Basic settings MODBUS H LE 152 Advanced ge RE 153 Devices een 154 Time synchronization asianc eneunaseteh a a 154 Internal communication settings eaeeesensensennnnnnenennennnnnnnnnnnonnennennnnnnnnnonnennnnnnnnnnenonnennnnnnnnn 155 DEVICE E 156 Deiere EIDEN geed EE ented Gere 156 lee 157 Command E 158 E KEE dE 159 LEE 159 e Vue E 160 Serial Port Assignment ssie Auen aa 160 settings SCADA ee ege ege ees he geed eege 161 lu 162 SUBEIVISOTV een anne tude REE aE paa aE eSEE Eini 164 Linked WT 167 lues veel EC EE 168 ug ge Ree uge ee TEE 169 DEVICE ET 170 lee 171 I e NEE 172 General Inf rmation 08 42 ee kein 172 SCL_Config engineering Tool 172 Displaying project configuration and properties of nodes ccccccceesseceessceeeesseeeessssaeees 174 Displaying source lED Hile se rei nein A Nii A SEa 175 Adding deleting and renaming devices 176 Adding deleting and renaming logical nodes 177 Selen e Te 178 Removing Data Objects n u euee ANEREN e 183 Restore Data Objects from Template cccccsscccccceeessessaeeeeeeesesseeeaeeeeeceseesssnsaeeeeeeseeesees 184 Renaming Data Objects sssrinin anria aai R De AN ENa 185 Changing of DO Data Class cc ssccccossscccdvessteccsevoceccoossneccossstecsoovotedsensstecesudeteecuissneeceessness 186 Chan
174. ess otherwise ignore address Port 1 to 65535 2404 TCP Port Max telegram 1 to 249 240 Maximum telegram length length k Value 1 to 32767 12 Max No of invalidated APDUs w Value 1 to 32767 8 Acknowledge latest after this number of APDUs w lt 2 3k t0 Timeout S 1to 255 30 Timeout for connection estab lishment t1 Timeout S 1to 255 15 Timeout for send or test APDUs t2 Timeout S 1to 255 10 Timeout for acknowledgement in the case of no messages t2 lt t1 t3 Timeout S 1to 255 20 Timeout for sending test frames in case of idle state IEC104 settings Page 119 We take care of it 13 2 2 ComServer settings IEC104 advanced settings tree branch contains ComServer specific settings COM Server Confirm Reset Add Inset Delete Row count 1 Tce pon time tet senar pon Ka E Be To change serial port interface go to Serial ports assignment page Serial ports assignment Figure 59 IEC104 ComServer settings Table 39 IEC104 ComServer settings Setting Format Range Default Description Activate Yes No No Option to disable the channel Connection type Selection of RAW State of channel values in SOCKET Serial Direct Telnet combo box Shared with IEC OFF IP address 4x 0 to 255 IP address TCP port 0 to 65535 3003 TCP port Inactivity timeout S 180 Timeout after which the serial device is closed if data transfer does not occur By default is 0 It means that seri
175. essage and this is not a result of trans function type mission with a control station REG PE D information uses address error multipoint number Function type of error multipoint is the IEC address of 0 to 255 0 function type of multipoint error address reset command Value is configurable in the range 0 255 function type The default value is 162 information Information number of error multipoint number is the information of the multi point error address Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is 0 Identification 8 charac EBERLE Name of producer of the device at the string ters time of initialization The maximal length of the string s name is 8 symbols which may be chosen freely The default value is EBERLE RS485 activated option NOT se Activation of RS485 interface box lected RTS CTS activated option NOT se Activation of Hardware Flow Control box lected XONN XOFF acti option NOT se Activation of Software Flow Control vated box lected Test Mode acti Selection activated Selection of way of activation the test vated of values via Com mode Possible options deactivated incombo mandtype activated via binary input activated via box 20 Command type 20 Binary Input for 0 to 15 Number of binary input for test mode Test Mode 65535 activation switching Test Mode com O to 255 128 Function type of command for test mode mand func type activation Test Mode com O to 255 21 I
176. ettings names according to the corresponding XML template The exported sheets also contain plain text describing setting names This information can be found in the second row of the table based sheets and in second columns of the other sheets Import from Excel Ways of import Commands from selected sheet to Commands page of selected device Indications from selected sheet to Indications page of selected device Import is performed from the Excel file with valid xls extension The file has to contain cor responding sheet with appropriate name and heading line with names of settings according to the corresponding XML template see Export Import function uses topical settings as target and replaces existing data in the target settings Import settings Device Import Identifier of the device 1 A 2 CH A 3 ICH A 4 CH E1 5 CH E2 Figure 14 Import settings Work with protocol settings Page 45 We take care of it Page 46 9 5 9 6 Migration of settings WinConfig can migrate settings between different versions of REG P telecontrol boards The migration can be done in two ways Convert GenReg INI file with REG P board type selected in the Open settings page oth er than the telecontrol board for which INI file was originally created e g INI file created for TK517 and IEC101 protocol can be open as IEC101 for TK400 telecontrol board Using Migrate button on Basic settings page In this way the migr
177. evice AA Poll string RPS 4 Type of seconds field INT32U v Offset of seconds field 18 byte Type of msec field INT16U wv Offset of msec field byte 22 Description Figure 84 MODBUS device request settings Table 63 MODBUS device settings Setting Format Range Default Description Identifier of de text 3 chars AA Identifier of device as appears vice in the device communication Poll string text 63 chars RPS 4 Device poll string Type of seconds Selection of INT32U Type of seconds field field values in combo box Offset of seconds byte 0 65535 18 Offset of seconds field field Type of msec field Selection of INT32U Type of milliseconds field values in combo box Offset of msec byte 0 65535 22 Offset of milliseconds field field Description text 30 chars empty User description Page 156 Modbus settings 18 5 2 a eberle A Indications Indications tree branch describes indications of individual device Indications m Columns to hide Description Data Model Address Bitin register Device offset RegSystype RPSbit Deviation Confirm Reset Add Inset Delete Export Import Advanced l Search Row count 348 Count of selected rows 0 ci peseroton Data Model 4 Address 4 A EC A RegSys type 4 Rie bev L ES CH ES Si DESS E EE Jo Jp I IESSE Yer mas fos PP Fees Jooree m ee pe
178. f Selection of value Processing of changes Should changes values in be set to value for EOR D device combo box type REG data type Selection of BITO Selection of regulator data type values in combo box RPS offset Oto 255 0 Definition of RPS offset Channel number Oto 255 0 Channel number Data structure Selection of Measured Data structure type type values in FLT Event combo box Dead band float 1 Dead band defines threshold to save new value in process im IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 107 We take care of it Page 108 Setting Format Range Default Description age and to send spontaneous message Scale float 1 Scale exponent value Value normalized float 3 Max value of data point ac for 100 cepted in the device communication Use in Gl Selection of No Option whether the data point values in will be used in GI combo box Initial value Selection of No Initial value transmission transmission values in combo box Description string 50 charac empty string User description of data point ters IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 5 3 a eberle A Indications EOR D Indications m Columns to hide Description IEC object type RegSys type IOA function type information number Abs deviation Scale Max value RPS offset nn inset JI Delete Gen wen Atvarced Row count 248 Count of selected rows 0 IOA mg Description m object 4 li ah a wm
179. f individual cells The check runs when the user leaves cell Entered values are checked on valid limits If limits are broken the last or default value is automatically entered and cell is marked by red color Correctly changed values are not marked User cannot leave the page without confirmation or resetting of the changed values Work with protocol settings a eberle A There is also additional integrity test of values present within the confirmation procedure This test checks three basic rules Test of non zero values of object addresses Existence of non empty command strings in command tables Test of uniqueness of object address which is performed entirely for all addressable objects in the settings i e comparison of each address with other addresses Unique ness of devices text IDs is not tested There are some exceptions from the rule e g in IEC103 TK8xx where TK3 type data points are tested on uniqueness together with measurement value type 10 IEC101 settings 10 1 Basic Basic settings tree branch form contains common settings of IEC protocol selection of available Baud rates Link and ASDU addresses shown as one number or pair of Bytes Basic settings also contain user definable descriptions and names for the entire set of settings Basic Settings description lec10 1_REG D_BASIC Baud rate of serial port IEC Bd 9600 v Link address of REG P 1 SC
180. f individual data points Indications m Columns to hide Buffer offset PMUID PMU data field Data field offset Data point name Description Data class buffer a en JL me Ge mort Row count 57 Count of selected rows 0 mo EME Phase to phase RMS voltage L1 L2 gt a a IO Phase to phase RMS voltage L2 L3 D fis 701 Phase to phase RMS voltage L3 L1 fo fis bo z al m Average of collective voltage fo E ba v al Figure 96 C37 118 Indications Table 75 C37 118 Indications Setting Format Range Default Description Description string 100 charac As defined in Description ters template Data class buffer Oto 254 As defined in Data class buffer template Buffer offset O to 65535 As defined in Buffer offset template PMU ID Selection of As defined in PMU ID in C37 118 communica values in template tion combo box PMU data field Selection of As defined in PMU data field in C37 118 values in template communication combo box Data field offset 0 to 65534 As defined in Data field offset in C37 118 template communication Data point name 16 charac As defined in Data point name in C37 118 ters template communication C37 118 Settings Page 171 We take care of it Page 172 20 20 1 20 2 IEC61850 General Information The firmware according to IEC 61850 6 imports an SCL file with name space definitions The contents of desc
181. fault value for REGSys INT16 Offset of msec byte Oto 255 22 The parameter defines the byte offset in fieldbyte defined poll string which includes a milliseconds part of time Default value is 22 Comment text 23 charac User comment ters Saving of settings in IEC61850 As the settings for IEC61850 protocol consist of XML template and ICD file the Save select ed settings to file icon offers separately saving of settings and saving of ICD file Save ICD ae J Gm Figure 164 Saving of settings in IEC61850 1EC61850 21 21 1 a eberle A WinConfig in Step by Step mode To run WinConfig in Step by Step mode click the Step by Step button in the splash screen when WinConfig starts WinConfig Step by Step mode is especially useful case when default configuration settings can be used with minimum modifications and the simplest failsafe way of data transfer Step by Step mode enables user to create and use typical configuration of settings without having exact knowledge of SCADA protocol data point settings protocol standards firm ware specific settings and other complex settings User typically selects board type SCADA and device template and enters a few application specific settings to create settings and to load the created settings into the board in the corresponding step Step by Step mode also gives the possibility to open settings pre defined in advanced mode XML file or settings created in GenRe
182. fer from PC Transfer manually via serial line of a eberle device for board types TK517 TK509 and TK400 Transfer manually and locally via Ethernet for TK400 board type Transfer remotely via Ethernet using COM Server and Ethernet booter application pro grams for TK400 Work with protocol settings Page 31 We take care of it Page 32 9 2 5 9 2 6 9 2 7 Transfer remotely via Ethernet using HTTPS protocol for TK8xx board types User actions for transfer to PC are similar to those for transfer from PC Important note When settings are transferred from PC to telecontrol board they are always transferred to gether with appropriate application protocol converter firmware with online WinConfig web pages etc for REG PE D boards and also together with RAMdisk and kernel for REG PE D boards can be selected as option Thus the remote detection Detect on LAN performed by WinConfig after successful trans fer of data shows version of application protocol firmware and also version of WinConfig that was also transferred to telecontrol board The settings file has no version Remarks to all Ethernet data transfers Detection of available telecontrol board is done by UDP broadcast telegrams Remote data transfers are done via TCP session open after successful detection WinConfig always changes IP settings of connected telecontrol board before the required data transfer is performed The change of IP settings is tem
183. fined in WinConfig However the default template files which can be created exist only for valid combinations already used and known If a template for a given combination is not available a warning message will appear onto the screen Template file isn t implemented for chosen combination protocol SCADA Eberle devices Default template will be used If the Continue button is pressed apart from invalid combinations a default template will be used to create the new set of settings Default templates typically contain basic configu rations without pre defined data points or commands Open conversion from INI import from Excel Open Settings from file XML settings In Order to open an existing XML settings file convert an existing INI file or import a Win Config exported Excel file please click the Open button To open existing settings please browse the settings file by using the Browse button and then click the Open button in the Open settings from file Group box Convert settings from GenReg ini file To convert settings from GenReg INI format browse the file by using the Browse button select required telecontrol board type from combo box and click the Convert button in the Convert settings from GenReg ini file frame WinConfig will automatically detect the protocol described in the INI file and converts the settings to a suitable format for the re quired board type Import settings from WinConfig exported Excel file
184. for TK509 and TK517 boards TK8xx DNP3 Basic REG D Yes Basic REG DP Yes Basic EOR D Yes TRANS REG D Yes POWER UNISON REG D Yes IEC101 Basic REG D Yes IEC103 Basic REG D Yes ABB REG D No Areva REG D No DB REG D No IDS REG D No Mauell REG D No NRM REG D No WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 259 We take care of it Page 260 Board Protocol Devices Template Note availability SAT REG D No Siemens REG D No Sprecher REG D No IEC103 Basic REG DP No ABB REG DP No Areva REG DP No DB REG DP No IDS REG DP No Mauell REG DP No NRM REG DP No SAT REG DP No Siemens REG DP No Sprecher REG DP No IEC103 Basic EOR D No ABB EOR D No Areva EOR D No DB EOR D Yes IDS EOR D No Mauell EOR D No NRM EOR D No SAT EOR D No Siemens EOR D No Sprecher EOR D No IEC103 Basic 2x EOR D No ABB 2x EOR D No Areva 2x EOR D No DB 2x EOR D Yes IDS 2x EOR D No Mauell 2x EOR D No NRM 2x EOR D No SAT 2x EOR D No Siemens 2x EOR D No Sprecher 2x EOR D No IEC103 Basic 3x EOR D No ABB 3x EOR D No Areva 3x EOR D No DB 3x EOR D Yes IDS 3x EOR D No Mauell 3x EOR D No NRM 3x EOR D No WinConfig in Step by Step mode a eberle A Board Protocol SCADA Devices Template Note availability SAT 3x EOR
185. g INI file Quick help is displayed in all steps in the right part of window to explain the corresponding settings and actions The Confirm button switches to the next step all entered values remembered The Back button switches to the previous step all entered values on the current form will be forgotten The Cancel button switches to the first step all previously entered values on the current form s will be forgotten The Finish button completes the protocol settings transactions and switches the user to the first step for another round of protocol settings should the user choose to enter another set of settings only on the last page Templates in Step by Step mode Step by Step mode of WinConfig works with pre defined templates of settings as described in chapter 8 2 1 1 Thus usage of templates is limited to configurations containing known and already used combination of board_type protocol SCADA_template Devices_template WinConfig will be equipped with other templates in new versions as soon as new templates will be available Individual steps are numbered according to the sequence valid for the individual board and protocol WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 253 We take care of it Page 254 21 2 Step 1 hardware User selects pre defined type of telecontrol board in the first step Selection is done in the corresponding combo box N Telecontrol 49 0 911 62 81 08 0 a eberie LAA WinConfig 11 0 6 info a eb
186. gain you can save it as WinConfig xml File Therefore activate it and navigate with the Browse button to your store path Enter a valid Filename and finish storing and configuration Export to xIs File EXCEL For a backup or if you need your configuration on a later time again you can export your settings as xls File Therefore activate it and navigate with the Browse button to your store path Enter a valid Filename and finish storing and configuration Note that an exported xis files can only be imported in advanced Mode You can use the EXCEL file export especially for documentation due to the readability nd Fr d Tips on Troubleshooting The subject of this chapter is for providing tips on troubleshooting with the REG PE REG PED device Firstly here are the essential points necessary to ensure correct operation A DANGER Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment and only after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this and the associated manuals as well as with the applicable safety regulations 22 1 Common troubleshooting tips IP address Has an IP address been set in the device If this setting has not been made it will not be possible to establish a link To validate the IP address it is possible to execute a ping from the network to the de vice s IP address using a Ping function on the Command line Subnet
187. ging the control model for controllable data oblects 187 Table of Contents Page 7 We take care of it Page 8 20 2 11 20 2 12 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 6 1 20 6 2 20 6 3 20 7 20 7 1 20 7 2 20 7 3 20 7 4 20 7 5 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 10 1 20 10 2 20 10 3 20 10 4 20 10 5 20 10 6 20 10 7 20 10 8 20 10 9 21 21 1 21 2 21 3 21 4 21 5 21 6 21 7 21 8 GOOSE ight Support a ie ae an ae 189 ege 197 lEBD Server Configuration Ree EES Edge 197 Logical Device Configuration ea Ra 198 Logical Node Configuration Rain AAAS 198 Common Data Attribute Confieuration 198 Status Value Confieuration 199 Control Value Configuration cissie sioiisinniirinkersicnsrniinesini nan iinekens inse ioins ini Sonnten 203 Set point Value Configuration Single Commande 213 GOOSE light Settings oscene ee a au 215 IEC GOOSE light Architecture asien lee ale 215 GOOSE light Control Blocks Settings ccccccccsssssssscecececessessceeeceeecesseseasseceesessseseasaeeeeeess 215 GOOSE light Input Streams Inner Subscribers 217 NEE ea ln in 217 Subscribe Side nee esse 222 WinConfig dl TC 231 leese E TAT E EES EE 231 AUVanced E 233 Serial Ports ssignment u ea Re einem erlernte 233 Settings SCADA u nk 234 ELAN extension CSE u ANESEC eege ausbauen 236 COMPESEIV GE E O T A E E E E E R 240 SUPEFVISOLY Enge TC 242 NEE el ge TE del EE 246 Internal communication 22 een 249 Attached Devices einigen anne ins
188. gle channel in an IEC 60870 5 103 sense Using WinEDC software is able to get sample files saved in inner EOR D memory Data can be saved in COMTRADE or CSV comma separated files Earth fault channels page contains parameterization of transmission disturbances Fault records fa Di abled reference Rated pinay gaiei ee Data type Offset Request command string Din elo om 1 i Die vja Een Olne elle non D H INT32 sl Eorkni2 No ele om 1 fh mme ls ran D no ele oan 1 1 INT32 alt Eorkni 4 z II Figure 55 IEC103 Device x Fault records EOR D Table 35 IEC103 Device x Fault records EOR D Setting Format Range De Description fault Disabled Option box Yes Enabling disabling of individual data point es Channel 0 to 255 64 According to IEC 60870 5 103 the number of channels indicates the number of analogue channels in transmission data NOC Number Reference float 1 Reference factor RFA defined in 7 2 6 17 IEC factor 60870 5 103 RFA is pre set to 0 001 REG PE D calculates the additional factors for each channel to limit values in range up to 31767 two bytes Then this additional factor is multiplied with preset RFA The result is transmitted as IEC Refer ence factor Rated float 1 Rated primary value RPV defined in 7 2 6 18 primary IE
189. gs REG PEID 2 3022 2422200200200 0002000 000mm dar asara Visiani 75 Table of Contents 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 1 3 12 1 4 12 1 5 12 1 6 12 1 7 12 1 8 12 1 9 12 1 10 12 1 11 12 1 12 12 1 13 12 1 14 12 1 15 12 1 16 12 1 17 12 1 18 12 1 19 12 2 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 12 3 4 12 3 5 12 3 6 12 4 12 4 1 12 4 2 12 4 3 12 4 4 12 5 12 5 1 12 5 2 a eberle COMM OM EE 75 IEC 60870 5 103 Conformity ccssscccececessessaececeeecesseseasececeescsesuaeaeseeecesseseeaeaeeeeseessesenaeess 75 Supported Type Identtfications siuen riseneeenne ieee enaa E e aeaee aaaea iaa aae a RAe kiaat 75 Supported Cause of Transmissi Nasseri isnie ueia ara eae EEK aE ES ENERE 76 Topical channel EE erugeet eege dee AAA A i 76 Fault Number FAN eier ee En 76 Interval between information elements UNT 77 Compatibility levellCOD u een eu 77 Number of channels NOC ccccccccsssceceesseceeecsececseaeeeceeaeeecsesaeeeeecsaeeessesaeeeesesaseeseesaeeeeeees 77 Number of information elements of a channel NOEI 77 Number OF tags NOT u 77 Number of relevant disturbance values per ASDU ND 77 Return information identifier RI 77 Scan number SCN EE 77 Supplementary information SIN 77 Status Of Faults SOR ars en nennen Eege 78 Tae Le Die EA EE 78 MPEG order TOO area nr en rn 78 Type of disturbance values TO 78 Binary TIM irn RHRnHRllieiuheiiehenisihin 79 E Den le 79 Advanced E
190. has to be entered to transfer data successfully Work with protocol settings Page 35 We take care of it Page 36 r Transfer settings and firmware from PC to telecontrol board Transfer settings from PC Automatic firmware transfer Forced firmware transfer O Please choose your application case M Usage of max 3 COM ports C Usage of max 4 COM ports forbidden in case of double optic Ethernet HTTPS access User name Admin Password ecceeeee Use last login values Forget login values m Transmission protocol Transmission protocol is set to HTTP Set HTTPS Set HTTP HTTPS protocol is recommended for improved security of data transfers Available board services Enable www pages Unlock UBoot k Enable SSH SFTP Unlock Console V Set For more information about board services see tooltips Status Finished Activity Completed detecting devices Steps to transfer settings 1 Detect board on LAN 2 Select board in the table 3 Transfer from PC to device Detect on LAN Change board IP settings Submit certificates Run RPL Cancel Figure 9 Transfer from PC for telecontrol boards type REG PE D Work with protocol settings a eberle TK8xx special controls Transfer steps Automatic firmware transfer Forced firmware transfer radio button selection wheth er WinConfig is supposed to decide about necessity to transfer also kern
191. he ICD file IEC61850 Page 175 We take care of it 20 2 3 Adding deleting and renaming devices Configuration change is done on the page Configuration To change the content of the device and its name use hot keys and popup menu panel Device e he I e Sr ar LD EOR D master relay 4 EM o Rename Ze LD EOR D master relay DIER 3 Add Device Pe LD EOR D master relay 6 E6 Pe LD EOR D master relay 7 E7 Br LD EOR D master relay 8 E8 m 4 Add DO to ICD from Template d Remove DO from ICD be e ak E el i wi d is in template CA LDJEOR D Mixe E ar a Rename CA ar LD EOR D master relay 6 BG We Add Device S ILDJEOR D master relay 7 E7 BE Remove Device PY LDJEOR D master relay 8 E8 Id Add Lode E Remove LNode Add DO to ICD From Template Remove DO from ICD Figure 103 Adding and deleting devices Figure 104 Renaming device Page 176 IEC61850 a eberle A 20 2 4 Adding deleting and renaming logical nodes To add new logical nodes of the necessary type to rename or delete from the configuration use hot keys and popup menu of the panel Device is in template bi ai LN Harmonic backward GGI 3 k LN Pulse forward GGIO 5 x LN Wattmetric forward GGIO Nt vy att Pack ward ha EI t E Er LN Common State L LN Transient backward GIO 2
192. he log file and displayed on the page Log Log files saved in Log application folder ISCH Contig File Tools Help Project E la bei E IC Work TSoft SCLSCL_Config T ool SCL61850x104_Config bin D ebug Project EOR Dx8 44 0 090326s E Tasks Configuration ICD file Log 18 11 2009 11 2 4 starting 56 Reading ICD file EOR Dx8 V44 0 090326 ICD IcD file successfully read Project successfully opened EOR Dx8 V44 0 090326 Reading ICD file EOR Dx8 V44 0 0903265 ICD 18 11 2009 11 54 55 ICD file successfully read VE 11 54 57 Project successfully opened EOR DX8 V44 0 0903265 Log File E Work TSoft SCL SCL_Config Tool SCL61850x104_Config bin Debug Logs 20091118 log Figure 129 Actions log IED Server Configuration Within IED Server Configuration the IED name and the description can be changed The tree view subentries of the server are directly resolved from the name space of the ICD file This defines that there may be different names for the logical devices and their subor dinated Nodes and their subordinated attributes That s why only an example can be discussed in the description Name REGDPD Version 1 0 Description REG D with GOOSE and REG DP Type REG_DPD Manufacturer A EBERLE Ok Cancel Figure 130 IED Server Description The length of the IED Name shall be at least one at maximum 64 characters It starts
193. he maximum message length Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 800 Cycle time ms Oto 65535 2000 This parameter specifies the cycle time with of device which the program checks the link status of status check the device is polling in the case of error in serial or frame Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 1500 Number of 1to 255 2 Defines a maximal count of synchronization repeats for requests if serial communication with SYNC cycle XXXSysTM Device fails The parameter can be adjusted from 0 255 By default it is 2 Number of Oto 255 1 Defines a maximal number of repetitions of poll repeats one command Default value is 2 Round time checkbox un If value equals No time stamps are round down checked ed up in scale of one second to prevent time inconsistencies with substation If value equals Yes time stamps are rounded down in scale of one second Default value is Yes Device IP Oto 65535 120 Defines number of polls after which IP address address netmask and gateway are requested request from a Eberle device They will are set then in repetition the loader environment The feature is sup ported only for REGSys devices Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is O 1EC61850 20 10 8 IEC61850 a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Wait for ms 100 to 8000 Maximal waiting time of the ch
194. hers a eberle de IEC103 full revision 1 5 05 05 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de IEC61850 full revision 1 6 26 05 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de IEC61850 IED name configuration 1 7 11 06 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Update to Version 9 9 versioning now same as WinConfig 9 9 13 09 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension to new doc guidelines 9 9 1 13 10 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de New SCL_Config 9 9 2 13 12 2012 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension of Modbus and RPL 9 9 4 01 03 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension of IEC 104 9 9 5 08 03 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension to PRP VO 10 5 2 28 11 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension to PRP V1 10 5 3 12 12 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension to Cyber Security Version 11 0 0 23 12 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension with IEC 60870 5 101 11 0 1 23 05 2014 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Cyber Security adjustable IEC 61850 Ed 2 11 0 2 23 07 2013 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Extension of IEC 61850 client functionality Grouping in IEC 11 0 3 10 09 2014 60870 5 104 Wolfgang Borchers wolfgang borchers a eberle de Various modifications 11 0 6 08 10 2015 Page 2 Copyi
195. ic Basic settings branch tree contains basic settings for DNP protocol conversion Settings description DNP3_REGD_BASIC DNP3 settings Baud rate of serial port DNP3 Bd 9600 wv Link address of REG P 103 Link address of DNP3 master DNP3 RS485 activated DNP3 fiber optics activated GO OI DNP3 RS232 used Idle mode of fiber optics is switched by accordant setting Device Identifier of device 1 AA Figure 66 DNP3 basic settings REG P Table 45 DNP3 basic settings REG P Setting Format Range Default Description Settings descrip text 50 characters Filename of Short user description of tion open set settings file or name of set tings tings file Baud rate of Bd selection of val 9600 Baud rate of serial port DNP serial port DNP3 ues in combo box Link address of 0 to 65535 103 Link address of REG P REG P Link address of 0 to 65535 1 Link address of DNP master DNP3 master DNP3 RS485 option box not selected DNP3 RS485 activated activated DNP3 fiber optics option box not selected DNP3 fiber optics activated activated DNP3 settings REG P Page 131 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description DNP3 RS232 used option box selected DNP3 RS232 used Identifier of de text AA or A 1 to 9 AA Identifier of device vice to Z 1 to 4 14 2 Advanced 14 2 1 Settings
196. igure 13 Compare settings The third compare mode implemented in WinConfig is comparison of the selected settings with settings contained in the connected telecontrol board This function is available in the Transfer settings to PC page as Compare to selected settings button It is necessary to de tect the board first in the case of remote mode The rules of comparison are same as described above This functionality cannot be used with TK509 telecontrol boards where Transfer settings to PC functionality are not available Work with protocol settings 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 a eberle A Rules for export import using Microsoft Excel Export to Excel Ways of export Commands only of selected device from Commands page Indications only of selected device from Indications page Entire selected settings using Export icon in the main menu Data is exported into the new file winconfig exportxx xls placed in the system temp folder Individual parts of exported data are placed in individual sheets of Excel workbook i e commands of each device and indications of each device are placed in corresponding sheets e g sheet of indications of device A is named x device A indications and commands sheet is named x device A commands where x is the device order number The character in device name is skipped as Excel doesn t allow usage of this character in the sheet name Data is arranged in lines First line represents heading with s
197. in the case of IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 109 We take care of it Page 110 12 5 4 Setting Format Range Default Description COT remote cause of the transition COT If O the data point will not be mapped to remote operation Remote COT Oto 255 0 Remote COT bits of remote offset bits of remote offset Feeder string 50 charac empty Feeder ters Description string 50 charac empty string User description of data point ters Commands Commands Columns to hide Disabled IOA function type information number Control code Command string RegSystype Scale exponent Use method of command value Description Confirm TI See TI a TI mee 1 Gees TI Geen import J Search 2 Rows count 25 Count of selected rows 0 D Disabieg amp 0A function type information Control code 4 c 4 string Reasys type 4 gett nt amp Use method of number Leder value Sea EI E EI sl Dinge wi 10 jd Type 20 General command jregootb 1 RegHosher BOOLEAN 1 Double command without space inverted M Applied in com Ojo wi bg jg Type 20 General command v fresco 1 RegTiefer BOOLEAN M 1 Double command without space inverted Applied in com D ne Si jo jl Type 20 General command v ke eeg 2 RegSWi BOOLEAN t Doubie command without space inverted Applied in com
198. ing tree branches To add new device to the topical settings check the corresponding Enabled option box Identifier of the enabled device can be consequently changed in the corre sponding Device x tree branch Devices Device Enabled Identifier of the device Poll type 1 RPS RPS RPS RPS RPS RPS RPS olnu oi ol Aaf G l N j j o j TIom m olol 9 RPS Figure 21 Linked Devices IEC101 settings a eberle A 10 3 1 Time synchronization Settings tree branch for time synchronization settings Time synchronization Synchronize direct connected device Le Synchronize all devices connected to ELAN Lal Figure 22 Time synchronization settings For parameters of Time synchronization in IEC101 for REG PE D see the EC103 for REG PE D chapter in this manual IEC101 settings Page 57 We take care of it 10 3 2 Internal communication The Internal Communication settings tree branch describes settings of communication set tings for communication between telecontrol board and a eberle device Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd 115200 v ON time of serial LEDs 10ms 1 Timeout for reception of first char 10ms 50 Inter character timeout 10ms 20 Number of repeats for SYNC cycle 5 Number of command repeats 2 TX blocking ms 30 Timeout for analogs cyclic sending 100ms 0 Time to stop device interrogation s 0 Round tim
199. inge O B IER 39 REG PE D board IP settings aua essen A a 40 REG PE D board ceftificatese n nennen nen wesen 42 Compare settings un ae ea 44 lee d d LTC 45 Missing incorrect values ccccccssccesscecssscecsseceeseeceseeecsaececsseceseecasecesaececseecesseecasesesaeeeeaseesees 46 IECIO1 b sic settings aaa LE 47 Settings SCADA IECTO1 REG P 4 200002203400 0000000 essen rannte rennen rn 49 Balanced mode SettingS nennen 51 Settings SCADA IEC101 REG PE D ccsccscssecsseceesneeeeseecsseeecseeessaeessaeesseneessaeeessaeessneees 53 TKAOO COMSEFVEF SCTE TC 55 linked DEVICES Auch ees deeg Eege AE eene Geet 56 Time synchronization Setting S serie nessen tns neei aare anae eae Ee EREKE NRE 57 Internal communication IEC101 for REG P uussseeeenesenenenenenenenenenenenenennnenenenenenenennnennnenenenn 58 ele ET ee 60 DEVICE reglest settings u scree n a EES 60 IEC101 device request settings for REG PEID 61 lee ug el EE 62 IEC101 Indications for REG PE D 2 440 een 63 IEC101 Commands sense een Hehe 65 IEC101 Commandse 0n hen rin 66 IEC101 Commands REG DEIDL raresa rros rse dsrs ens rrei 66 Editing the IOA bytes in entire columns sssssssssssssssserrerssssseserrnsrssssrrernnsssseserennnsseseserensnsses 67 SUACUS EC 69 IS ef Ee leg TEE 71 IEC1O3 c nverter dE 73 IEC103 device request settings uaeeeesensnneennnnenennnnnnnennnnnnonnnnnnnennennnnonnnnnnnsnnennenennnnnensnne
200. isplaying source ICD file Full original ICD configuration file is displayed on the page ICD file You can stay and ex pand individual nodes configuration similar to the display of XML files in Microsoft Internet Explorer SC File Project E B EAWork TSof SCLISCL_Config T ooh SCLB1850 104_Config bin Debug Project EOR Dx8 V44 0 080326s Tasks Configuration ICD file Lon lt xml version 1 0 encoding IS0 8859 1 gt Jo lt edited with MLSpy v2007 rel 3 http fumw altova com by Alexander Zakharov SI Alexander Zakharov gt fen lt SCL xmins http waw jec ch 61850 2003 SCL xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi schemaLocation http waw jec ch 61850 2003 SCL SCL xsd gt lt Private type ICD_SUPPORTED_VERSION gt VersionICD 6 2 0 lt Private gt lt Header id Eberle Regs EOR D version 4 revision 40 toolID SSI Tool namestructure IEOName gt lt History gt lt Hitem version 4 revision when 2008 10 10 who al TELE DATA what GGIO 10 Inst confReportcontrol added Reporting error fixed gt lt Hitem versio 4 2008 11 14 whi az TELE DATA why Enumeration of KEMA and SPOT gt lt Hitem versiol 2009 02 08 whi az TELE DATA why without GOOSE ControlBlock Opertm put off gt lt Hitem version revision 40 when 2009 03 26 who az TELE DATA why Configuration for 8 LDevices gt lt History gt Header gt Communica
201. ist Value quality The parameter defines a kind of quality rating of object in data set Possible choices are listed in the pull down list Command execution activate V Data Quality order LEE c only value F ierg SZ Executing types with quality enable to handle the object dependent on of their quality The object with quality should be represented in GOOSE dataset as two part data attribute with value and its quality as Bitstring 13 0000000000000 The quality can be located instant before or after value data attribute Only value Command must be executed after change of object value regardless of whether quality is invalid or valid Value quality quality is located instant after value Object will be accepted only if its quality is valid Object quality must be instant follow If quality is valid and value of the object was changed com mand will be executed Otherwise object will be ignored Quality value quality is located instant before value Object will be accepted only if its quality is valid Object quality must be instant before value If quality is valid and value of the object was changed command will be executed Otherwise object will be ignored Only Quality Special type It is used for handling of the quality triggering If quality will change a corresponded command will be sent to REGSYS This type is applicable only for data type QUALI TY Comment string
202. k a Trace via TCP Port recommended D General options Extended Trace for Common Functions 0 Parse Settings General Warnings and Errors General Events Time Synchronization SNTP and Device Process Image Commands Execution Oooaaqadg Eberle Device Verbose Output o Link Layer m Link State Machine 7 Application Layer IEC Protocol Verbose Output o Link Layer m Link State Machine Application Layer U COM Server Trace Activate trace o Level User Trace via PARAM Connector limited capacity due to RS232 bottleneck Trace via TCP Port recommended oO TOP Port Oo Logging with Timestamp Performance reduction amp COM Server Tx Rx Mirroring Activate U TCP port Figure 60 IEC104 Supervisory settings IEC104 settings Page 123 We take care of it Table 40 IEC104 Supervisory settings Page 124 Setting Format Range Default Description Level Selection of Deactivate Level of Log messages values in combo box Trace output radio button PARAM Option to trace via PARAM connector connector or via TCP General options checkbox unchecked Extended Trace for Common Extended Trace Functions General options checkbox unchecked Parse Settings Parse Settings General options checkbox unchecked General Warnings and Errors General Warnings General options checkbox unchecked General Events General Events
203. kes effect after board restart 5 Back e Go to main menu Recovery menu 1 Reboot and format applications part of firmware e Sets the formatting flag and performs board reset Attention this service formats the jffs2 area without possibility of recovery This service is determined for emergency situations only when the board stuck and there is no other possibility of fix The off line WinConfig can be consequently used for transfer of new firmware 2 Back e Goto main menu 7 Supported protocols and telecontrol board types Telecontrol board types Available protocols Protocols Accessible via REG PE D TK860 TK885 IEC104 DNP3 Modbus IEC103 IEC61850 ComServer only CSO C37 118 PQI DA TK885 1 CSO IEC61850 IEC104 IEC104 REG P TK509 TK517 IEC101 balanced unbalanced Serial Write only IEC103 DNP3 REG P TK400 IEC101 balanced unbalanced Serial Write only and Com IEC103 DNP3 CSO Server Read and Write PQI DA TK400 CSO Serial Write only and COM Server Read and Write Further protocols can be implemented on demand please contact info a eberle de Supported protocols and telecontrol board types Page 25 We take care of it Page 26 Introductory window The following introductory window should appear on your screen after WinConfig is start ed The following user actions are available from this screen Select WinConfig language from the combo box in the upper right c
204. l Interval The poll type of logical de ues in combo box vice It is the characteristic of the delivered setting s set Do not change the setting without confirmation of Eberle staff Number of read Selection of val 1 Defines a number of the 256 byte rec ues in combo box entries replayed in one re ords quest Comment 23 characters C_c2_1 200 Comment ms Device Request Settings Data class used Identifier of device Device role Mapped in data points Poll string Size of snswer byte Type of seconds field Offset of seconds field byte Type of msec field Offset of msec field byte Earth faults acquisition Number of fault files Function ID for faults Comment Yes ONo E1 Master Slave in master O self eormess 11 118 INT32U w H INTISU u 4 3 151 active O ignore TEST_1 Figure 51 IEC103 Device x Device settings EOR D IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 105 We take care of it Table 31 IEC103 Device x Device settings EOR D Setting Format Range Default Description Data class used Option boxes Yes Usage of Data class Identifier of de 3 characters E1 Identifier of device vice Device role Option boxes In master Device role Poll string 24 characters eormess 11 Poll string Size of answer byte 1to 255 118 Size of answer Type of seconds Selec
205. l model for controllable data objects cccccssssecececessesssteaeeeeeens 187 New attributes for selected sbo control model 188 Excluded attributes for selected direct control model 188 GOOSE settings Pape nee u eaae s deae Eea deee REE ogue Sae 189 GOOSE Control BlOCKS list en 190 Parameters for the new GOOSE Control Block 190 Common settings of the GOOSE Control Block 191 Communication settings of the GOOSE Control Block 191 Data Set of the GOOSE Control Block 191 Adding the Data Object to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block 192 Adding the Data Object to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block 192 Adding structure valWTr to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block 192 External P blishers List n een ae in Rare 193 Adding and deleting Subscribers and Data Oblects 193 Adding Subscribers and Data Objects from CD fle 194 External Publisher Settings cccsscccccecssssssssececeeecessesseaeseeecscessesaeaeeeeecsseseeaeaeeeeeeeeeeegs 195 List of Figures Page 279 We take care of it Page 280 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 1
206. l settings lEC104 Channels p BEE E eee aen d ek EE zg ES I Je zee elo T sens D Stee Te zee CR ke E SE ca sr wo po IK eee mo B n ft eee ep Bes een gp pooo fp T eee eo poo IE ee so po ES 2m pos Ph sees ASDU address D Jraepun Ze bh Errors data type KEE IEC address of error multipoint be cn Jm Johe J Reject commands with unknown address C Max telegram length k Value fiz w Value t0 Timeout s Figure 58 IEC104 Settings SCADA Page 118 IEC104 settings a eberle A Table 38 IEC104 settings SCADA Setting Format Range Default Description Port 1 to 65535 2404 TCP port for IEC104 connection Enabled checkbox unchecked Option to enable disable the corresponding IEC104 channel Remote IP ad 4x 0 to 255 192 168 1 68 IP addresses of remote station dress 192 168 1 64 authorized for connection with 192 168 1 43 telecontrol board Remote ASDU 0 to 65534 1 ASDU address of remote station address authorized for connection with telecontrol board ASDU address 1 to 65534 62166 ASDU address ASDU2 ASDU1 or 0 to 255 Errors data type selection of TI30 IEC data type of errors values in combo box IEC address of Oto 0 0 162 IEC address IOA of multipoint error multipoint 16777215 for errors or 3x Oto 255 Reject commands option box Not selected Reject commands with unknown with unknown addr
207. le 11 IEC101 indications Setting Format Range Default Description IEC object type selection of val TI1 Indication type in IEC communi ues in combo box cation REG data type selection of val Bit Indication type in device com ues in combo box munication Information ob O to 16777215 0 IEC address IOA of indication ject address IOA or IOA hi mi lo 3x 0 to 255 Abs deviation float 0 Absolute deviation value Scale float 0 Scale value Max value 0 to 65535 32767 Max value RPS offset Oto 255 0 RPS offset RPS bit selection of val 0 RPS bit ues in combo box P1 data type P1 selection of val IEEE type P1 data type method ues in combo box P1 index P1 3 to 255 3 P1 index method Table P1 meth selection of val 0 Table No if 32 bit data type is od ues in combo box used IEC101 settings a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Bit P1 method selection of val 0 Bit No if 32 bit data type is ues in combo box used Description text 50 chars empty Description Indications m Columns to hide Description Disabled Information object address IOA IOA hi milo IEC objecttype RegSystype RPS offset RPSbit Deadband De interrogation Inverted Remote COT Offset Remote COT Bit Send if only quality changed C o Ess Row count 245 Count of selected rows 0 A A i eier A IEC A A Description Disabled udress 7 OA himilto object RegSys
208. ll be set After first list list executed 1 Objects will be initialized 2 Their commands will be executed GOOSE 1 Objects will be initialized 1 Objects will be initialized 2 Their commands will be executed 53U message The parameter defines the handling of first GOOSE telegram 1 After start up of REG PEX the process image will be filled with topical value Only if the value changes it will be sent to eberle device This makes sense e g at auto man command Page 224 IEC61850 20 7 5 2 IEC61850 a eberle A Name Unit Range Standard Description value 2 After start up of REG PEX the first reception of a GOOSE message will lead to an immediate com mand to eberle device This makes sense e g at trip close information of relays for paragramer use since the eberle device needs an up to date information right from the beginning Failure de Defines behavior and commands in case tection At publisher timeout detection commands If publisher is received successfully again Failure detection commands At publisher timeout detection this command will be sent B31 1 if publisher is received successfully again this command will be sent These Commands will be sent to Logical Device Comment string upto Not de User commentary for subscriber stream 64 fault sym bols Binding to External Inputs List of GOOSE light External Input Objects The
209. matically started by the start of the application if it receives a list of NTP servers main and secondary from the sntp param file Otherwise time is not synchronized by the user with NTP server REG PE REG PED use these servers for installation of system time at real time The current SNTP settings provide one or two IP addresses of the NTP servers available for time synchronization One server acts as primary server and the other as a backup server The NTP servers must be listed in the order of preference You can choose your preferred NTP servers on default Main NTP server REG PE REG PED analyses the availability of servers their priority and also their switching If the main NTP Server does not work or is not defined time is set by the secondary NTP Server NTP Servers provide first time synchronization at the start of the application If your NTP Servers support broadcast request responses a first time synchronization can proceed up to 10 seconds before Time synchronization NTP specific NTP primary server IP address 192 168 1 140 NTP secondary server IP address 192 168 1 5 Period between the attempts to set the clock 16sec e Max timeout for the server response ise si Number of time samples in each clock cycle 3 samples v Minimal time offset of clock relative to server 0 000001 Scale for estimation of the NTP offset worth 1 DCF77 synchronization specific Version 1 04 00 build
210. mation associated then the attribute stVal does not exist In that case the value range for ctlModel is restricted to direct with normal security and sbo with normal security gy DOI Health e mz DOI Loc H A DO OpCntRs Control Model Editor ai DO TapChg Common SD vaWTr Control Model direct wth enhancedsecurty 7 1 mn eng Bier 9 DAI ctiModel SE direct with enhanced securty SDI Oper sbo with enhanced security 9 DAI ctlVal Ge nn DO Type Id reg_d_StdBSC Figure 142 Control Model Parameter Set point Value Configuration Single Command Set point values are to be configured as a mixed form of a status value and a command Here the check box Multi Line is not checked If it gets checked the mode will be changed to Multi Command Page 213 We take care of it Page 214 mz DO Fail t01 a g DO A25 2 9 DO SPindex e OO 9 DAI minVal DAI maxVal DAI stepSize 3 94 DO SPVall H A DO SPVal2 9 DON SPVal3 zt DO SPVal4 g DO TRatV 3 94 DO TRatA zt DO TRatW 2 DO SPValVNom Ag DO PwrNom g DOI VArNom d ur r sAddr Editor Functional constraint SP SG SE Setpoint Setting group Common Set Point Settings Pre Conditions Read Write Setting Read Wite IEC Data Type Mapping in Poll String activate 7 Read Wite Device Data Type Read Poll String Offset 105 Write Command RegSWI Scale Scale in Write
211. mber of dial 1to 255 2 Number of dial repeats repeats Dial pause S 1 to 60 1 Dial pause Time to keep s 1 to 60 1 Time to keep connection open connection open Page 52 IEC101 settings a eberle A 10 2 2 1EC101 Settings SCADA for REG PE D telecontrol boards IEC101 Settings SCADA for REG PE D boards contain IEC101 specific parameters for cor responding firmware in REG PE D TK860 TK885 telecontrol boards Interface settings Serial port Baud rate of serial port IEC Bd 19200 se Parity EVEN zw ON time of serial LEDs ms 10 RS485 activated oO RTSICTS oO XON XOFF Fj Connecting fiber optic module FTR is possible but idle mode must be set via jumper in module Protocol settings Link address of REG PE D 1 o Linkto 1 ASDU address 1 ASDUhi 0 ASDU Io 1 Link address size 1 ASDU address size ER Info address size EE Use originator 0 F Max length of telegram 200 Link status timeout ms 3000 First char timeout ms 30 Max timeout between master requests s 1000 Activate termination after command Max waiting time for ACK NACK s 6 Max waiting time for command after select s 5 Mode of watchdog LED blinking ze Cont Figure 19 Settings SCADA IEC101 REG PE D IEC101 settings Page 53 We take care of it Page 54
212. me synchronization settings EOR D Setting Format Range Default Description Strategy of device Selection of all Strategy of device time syn time synchroniza checkboxes chronization tion UTC character Oto 255 176 UTC character List of synchro 3 characters List of synchronized devices if nized devices of device ID only the following list option is used IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 99 We take care of it Page 100 12 4 3 Internal communication PQI D Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd 115200 Parity EVEN wi RTS CTS oO XON XOFF oO ON time of serial LEDs ms 10 Cycle time of poll ms 20 Wait time for ACK or next sequence frame ms 900 Cycle time of device status check ms 1400 Number of repests for SYNC oycle 2 Number of poll repests 1 Round time down o Measurements transmission mode MEA Transmit on reception Cyclic transmission Transmit measurement if devistion 0 Yes No Transmission interval of measurements ms PQI D version of firmware V4 xx V52x O V2 xx V3 xx Command executed on startup lsysopen__ pqibreset 9 sysreset 0 Number of polls for IP check 0 Figure 48 IEC103 Internal communication PQI D Table 28 IEC103 Internal communication PQI D Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate of device serial
213. mission without abortion lt 36 gt end of channel transmission with abortion by control system lt 37 gt end of channel transmission with abortion by the protection equipment lt 38 gt end of tag transmission without abortion lt 39 gt end of tag transmission with abortion by control system lt 40 gt end of tag transmission with abortion by the protection equipment lt 64 gt disturbance data transmitted successfully positive lt 65 gt disturbance data transmitted not successfully negative lt 66 gt channel transmitted successfully positive lt 67 gt channel transmitted not successfully negative lt 68 gt tags transmitted successfully positive lt 69 gt tags transmitted not successfully negative 12 1 18 Type of disturbance values TOV Page 78 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A It is not used and set to 1 The value is irrelevant 12 1 19 Binary time CP32Time2a and CP56Time2a are supported according to IEC 60870 5 4 12 2 Basic settings The Basic page contains basic settings for IEC103 protocol Settings description EC103_PQID_IDS Baud rate of serial port IEC Bd 19200 wv Link address of REG PE D 201 ASDU address 201 RS485 activated oO Idle mode of fiber optics is switched by accordant setting Device Identifier of device 4 be Figure 37 IEC103 basic settings REG PE D IEC103 se
214. n Topically logical node settings are read only Depending on the ICD file all nodes having at tributes are shown Common Data Attribute Configuration The data attributes which can be parameterized are passed by the ICD file These attrib utes have a private data record of type sAddr in field of IED DOI Since this data record it is already default e g an IEC61850 status value or control value can be parameterized There is no user support for directly editing the ICD file That s why only the interface of the web server is described Special courses on ICD file editing for engineers are available at a Eberle on demand IEC61850 a eberle A 20 6 1 Status Value Configuration Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Log Device Properties JED S Me Ir ieee S Name Value mz DOI ELANFail SI name stVal 2 DOI ParPFail sAddr 2 50 35 0 4 g DOI OvLogMem AZ DO Ov Ay DON OvA a ge ay DO Inh m D 3 9 DON FstDown sAddr Editor Gaz DOI FstUp d Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands 8 94 DO InhHi Common Settings GOOSEllight DPS Events AZ DOI Slave Generic Settings z DON Master 1EC61850 Data Type BOOLEAN r fA DOI RegU2Act ag DON RegU1Act Device Data Type BIT_3 BYTE KA 8 94 DON TapChgOper Mppingin Pol Swing 8 8 94 DOI TapChgDown D ag DON TapChgUp Poll String Offset 4 mz DOI UnUnV Deadban
215. n as well as options of the configuration logical object and options of the field sAddr if exists in the chosen object DAI I SCH Connig File Tools Help Project amp la be DO CAWork TSoft SCLASCL_Config Tool SCL61 850x104_Config bin D ebug Project EOR Dx8 V44 0 090326 Ki Tasks Co 2 NCD file Log Device Properties IED Project Chtaeeage ag Name REGS1 Version e Ze LDJEOR D master relay 1 E1 e Se LD EOR D master relay 2 E2 Description REGS1 Type EY LD EOR D master relay 3 E3 Manufacturer A EBERLE e Ze LD EOR D master relay 4 E4 a Ge LD EOR D master relay 5 E5 mz 28 LD EOR D master relay 6 E6 EF LD EOR D master relay 7 E7 Object Editors e e LD EOR D master relay 8 E8 Not available Figure 100 Displaying the project configuration TSCh Connie CS File Tools Help Project E Tasks Configuration ICD file Log USE Properties JED Project E fel D Saam oe oy TARAG Name Value e Ge LDJEOR D master relay 1 E1 inst E3 e e LD EOR D master relay 2 E2 desc EOR D master relay 3 mz Ge LD EOR D master relay 3 E3 e Ge LDJEOR D master relay 4 E4 e Y LDJEOR D master relay 5 E5 In ar LD EOR D master relay 6 E6 EF LD EOR D master relay 7 E7 Object Editors a Se LD EOR D master relay 8 E8 Not available Figure 101 Displaying the properties of nodes 1EC61850 a eberle Za 20 2 2 D
216. n settings of devices for TK8xx board types and IEC104 protocol conversion Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd ON time of serial LEDs 10ms Timeout for reception of first char 10ms Inter character timeout 10ms Number of repeats for SYNC cycle Number of poll repeats Discard cmd buffer after TI30 TI31 error Time to wait after answer rec ms Timeout for analogs cyclic sending s Time to stop device interrogation 3 Round time down Round time up m 7 Figure 63 Internal communication settings Table 42 IEC104 Device communication settings Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of device Bd 1200 115200 Baud rate of device serial port serial 115200 ON time of serial 10 ms 1 to 100 2 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Timeout for recep 10 ms 1to255 50 Timeout for reception of first character IEC104 settings 13 3 3 a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description tion of first char Inter character 10 ms 1to255 20 Timeout between two characters in timeout telegram Number of repeats 1to255 10 Number of repeats for SYNC cycle for SYNC cycle Number of com 1to255 3 Number of command poll repeats mand repeats TX blocking ms Oto 255 Time to wait when answer was received Timeout for analog s
217. nennen 73 IEC103 basic settings REG DEID seus viss ss arenai roes ri ss Eurre ak sves vrik rosa 79 IEC103 settings SCADA for POI D a u en la aah 81 IEC103 settings SCADA for FOR D 85 Receiving Online Data from PQI D per shared channel COM Server 87 Online data Overview via REG PE D COM Server Comberver ssssssssssensssrnssrrensserrnsserenn gt 88 List of Figures Page 277 We take care of it Page 278 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Online graphic disturbance data from POL D 88 IEC103 advanced settings PQI D Comberver 89 Comserver settings EOR D 2 ie gege Be nenne 93 Supervisory settings BEG PEIDL 96 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings POLD 98 IEC103 Devices Time synchronization settings FORD 99 IEC103 Internal communication PQI D ccccccccccsssssssseseceeecesseseeaeseeeeecessesseaeseeeeseessesesaeees 100 IEC103 Devices EOR D Internal communication 102 IECTO3 DevicexX POND is u ehesten 104 IEC103 Device x Devi
218. nformation number of command for test mand info number mode activation Interval between information ele ments INT in Type 23 us The interval for acquisition of the single information elements is the same for all disturbance data It is listed in microsec onds Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 293 For more information see chapter 7 2 6 7 in IEC 60870 5 103 IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 83 We take care of it Setting For Range Default Description mat Max Number of The number of information elements in information ele each channel All channels contain the ments of a same number of information elements channel NOE in This number is transmitted in ASDU Type Type 26 id 26 ready for transmission of disturb ance data being valid for all channels Inter transmis Value is configurable in the range sion delay for 0 65535 The default value is 700 transmission ASDU Type 23 ms Default values always depend on values entered in the corresponding template Page 84 IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 3 2 1EC103 Settings SCADA for EOR D device Interface settings Serial port COMI eg rate of serial port IEC wem MW Parity EVEN ON time of serial LEDs ms RS485 activated o RTSICTS Serial flow control Handshake RTS OFF v Protocol settings a eberle A Link address of REG PE D ASDU address Inter char
219. ng of this document and giving it to others and the use of communication of the contents thereof are forbidden without express authorities Offenders are liable to the payment of damages All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design a eberle Table of Contents 11 1 2 1 3 2 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 9 2 5 9 2 6 9 2 7 9 2 8 9 2 9 9 2 10 USEF GUIDANCE sccsssccssesansssosssaccsnsnansssvedaaccanesnnsssvsscaccavennesssveseec svcatesssvsseocesveseasesvessesssves 10 VE 10 lee 10 Other tele eege edd re ess nen Eed 10 Scope of Delivery siisscccsccssicccssssccccessscsccssssccscssssccccsssaccccessscccesssaccccsesaccccsssnecsssssacccssssnccsss 11 Scope of Delivery un anna nn EAA A N 11 Supported Software s 2s0 s5s200 00004000H 0040000000 400Hanentnnnun en annnane dip ok nennen nern nee 11 Introduction sn enbnnessssi ccccucaeevedsssseescsseaavescessccccess 13 El TN E 14 WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED sssssecscceceseesssscereccecesessesseecceseceeessessssaseeses 14 WinConfig Software introduction serseri aaas a ias aiai 14 Mohican server TCP port management and WinConfig logging 15 REG PEX Loader SoftWare E 17 Communication with REG PE D telecontrol board in WinConfig 171 18 RULES TOP higher security en Ee ANS EEN deeg D eg ged 19 SEIP Access a RE RR RER 19
220. nge Default Description Link address 1 to 65534 1 Link address as 16 bit number unstructured Link address 2x 0 to 255 0 1 Link address as two 8 bit num structured bers ASDU Address 1 to 65534 1 ASDU address as 16 bit number unstructured ASDU Address 2x 0 to 255 0 1 ASDU address as two 8 bit structured numbers Enable Origina Option box not selected Option to enable originator in tor IEC101 protocol Baud rate Selection of val 19200 Speed of IEC101 serial port ues in combo box WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 265 We take care of it Hardware ST ERC 3 IEC 60870 5 103 Wick help Please configure your protocol The Link address is the device s physical name Please use this entry to enter the Link address in a unstructured decimal way In general the Link address is defined by SCADA engineer The allowed values are lt 1 254 gt Link address 3 ASDU Address ASDU Address 3 You can use this entry to enter the protocol specific ASDU Address also known as Baud rate CASDU in a decimal way In general the Link 19200 v address is defined by SCADA engineer The Weg allowed values are lt 1 254 gt Baud rate The Baud rate defines the data communication Use COM Server function e speed Most common values are 9600 baud and 19200 baud In general it is defined by Don t use COM Server function SCADA engineer cancer gt zem d rom Figure 168 Protocol selecti
221. ngs Command 2a 920 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Scale Scale in Write Command 0 Command Example z Command Defines the command string which is assigned with converted IEC con trol value of scale rule The result is sent to XXXSysTM device IEC61850 If IEC Type of command is BOOLEAN scale parameter will be used as shown below sAddr Editor Functional constraint CO Control Common Contr Type IEC Multi Command activate F Single Command Command a8 920 ff regup 1 else 1 aa q20 Page 205 We take care of it Table 82 Boolean conversion rules for command convert ctIVal Scale IEC Value Conversion 1 False command 2 1 True command 1 Command Behavior Type Double command without space inverted 1 e 1 aanta 2 False True command Settings Command 3a q20 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Command Behavior Type Command without value 2 v Ste atan aanta 3 False command space 1 3 True command space 2 33 920 ff regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Double command with space 3 Se atan aanstaan Page 206 IEC61850 a eberle A Scale IEC Value Conversion 4 True command 2 4 False command 1 38 920 f regup 1 else reqdown 1 aa q20 5 False command 1 5 True command 0
222. ns the telnet protocol on the port to set up telnet settings This is most useful for using telnet USD enables the shared port and transfers all data as is between port and the device vie shared serial USD mode used for global resource sharing from Network and IEC control center IP address 4x 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 IP address TCP port 0 to 65535 3003 TCP port Inactivity s 180 Inactivity timeout timeout Serial port Selection of COM2 Selection of serial port values in combo box Baud rate Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate values in combo box Page 148 CSO settings REG PE D a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Parity Selection of Even Parity values in combo box Stop bits Selection of 1 Stop bits values in combo box Data bits Selection of 8 Data bits values in combo box XON XOFF Selection of No Option to select XON XOFF handshaking values in combo box RTS CTS Selection of No Option to select RTS CTS handshaking values in combo box RTS in Selection of No Option to select inversion of RTS signal verted values in combo box TxD in Selection of No Option to select inversion of TxD signal verted values in combo box Interface Selection of RS232 Selection of interface type type values in combo box CSO settings REG PE D Page 149 We take care of it Page 150 17 2 CSO Supervisory settings
223. nt activity on eberle a eb Ethernet line 2 Indication of communication on serial ports 1 to 4 S send data R receive data F error 3 Watchdog indication Hardware or application fault First of all check please network connection and power supply Then follow the instructions described above Page 272 Tips on Troubleshooting N a eberle A Communication REG PE REG D faults 1 Check please device settings 2 Check communication settings of REGSys baud rate parity etc Note If the problems persist please ask your system administrator first For further assistance please contact a eberle product support at http www a eberle de LED s status of REG P Indication version TK400 board Normal operation 1 Reset button 2 Indication of watchdog or COM Server running 3 Indication of transmit receive and error in communication be tween REG P and external device using the topical protocol 4 Indication of transmit receive and error in internal communica tion between REG P and a eberle device All LEDs blinking invalid combination of firmware and settings Ethernet booter operation 1 Ethernet booter is waiting for connection LEDs alternately blinking 2 Ethernet booterfinished data transfer and stores data in the in ternal memory Running light indicates data transfer Tips on Troubleshooting Page 273 We take care of it Serial booter operation
224. numerical order its input telegrams cannot be handled in an applica tion More detailed information is available below 20 7 4 Publisher Side The current paragraph illustrates the generic Object Oriented Substation Event configura tion within the MMS server and SCL which defined in ICD file in your settings The GOOSE light configuration database contains settings with the following data elements Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Log GOOSE Control Blocks Object Editors General settings for GOOSE ur e Cen GOOSE Control Block Editor T GoCb_RegATCC utput messages C Settings ication Setti Data Set F GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration i E SIS C D gor e GOOSE ID Gold_RegATCC Control Block Name GoCb_RegATCC DataSet Name GoDs_RegATCC Input messages Se Control Block Description ATCC Specific DataSet Description GOOSE ATCC Specific IEC61850 Page 217 We take care of it Page 218 Figure 147 Publisher and Subscriber sides Adjusted GOOSE settings will be saved to file goose param At the same time an ICD file contains the factory GOOSE settings You should also take that into account All changed parameters are available only after resetting the REG PE REG PED GOOSE Control Block Editor Common Settings Communication Settings Data Set LDevice Instance A e GOOSE ID Gold_RegATCC Control Block Name GoCb_RegATCC DataSet Name GoDs_R
225. of the Goose strategy type arithmetic sion ji other and profile geometric Strategy rofile name IS Disabled option enables the Type arithmetic application to send new GOOSE telegrams after changes or by expiring default step delay timeout First inter ms 0 upto 1000 The parameter defines the first interval in milli val 65535 seconds in arithmetic retransmission scheme Zero will be ignored and the application sets default value 1000 ms Multiple dec 0 upto 2 The setting defines the multiplier the for arith arithmetic 255 metic retransmission scheme Zero will be ignored and the application sets default value 2 H IEC61850 a eberle A Name Unit Range Standard Description value Max Interval ms 0 up to 4000 The setting defines the maximal interval in milli arithmetic 65535 seconds in arithmetic retransmission scheme Zero will be ignored and the il application sets default value 4000 ms Number of dec up to 6 6 The setting defines a number of intervals in the Intervals profile retransmission scheme Interval dec Up to 1000 The intervals in milliseconds in profile retrans timeouts 255 1500 mission schema If any changes of Goose data occur the application sends Goose data and 2000 SEN then resets the retransmission time to value of 2500 first interval 3000 4000 IEC61850 Page 221 We take care of it 20 7 5 20 7 5 1 Page 222 Subscribe Side
226. oint bit comprises all defined bits in the table Data type of errors in the IEC protocol is defined in IEC101 set tings se chapter 4 2 2 IEC101 settings Page 59 We take care of it 10 4 10 4 1 Page 60 Converter errors o Comment Information object address IOA 08 hilmillo D Device 1 communication error 8208 o 1132 1116 1 Device 2 communication error jo o 0 110 2 Device 3 communication error o o 10 110 3 Device 4 communication error o o 0 110 4 Device 5 communication error o o 0 110 5 Device 6 communication error o lo 10 110 6 Device 7 communication error o o 10 110 7 Device 8 communication error o 1 lo 10 110 multipoint o b po Mo Figure 24 Converter errors Device x Device request settings Device request settings tree branch describes communication settings of individual devices connected to telecontrol board Device Request Settings Identifier of device AA Poll type RPS Poll string RPS 4 RPS specific Size of answer byte 244 Offset of seconds field byte 18 Offset of msec field byte 22 Figure 25 Device request settings Table 9 IEC101 device settings Setting Format Range Default Description Identifie
227. ommand activate Single Command Settings Command a8 920 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Type Command with value defaut 0 if value 00 s8 920 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q200 if value 11 aa q20 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa 9203 Ok Cancel Page 179 We take care of it Page 180 sAddr Editor Functional constraint CO Control Common Control Type IEC Mutti Command activate Extended Settings Checked Data Point Type BIT_7 BYTE Z Poll String Offset 3 Checked Value optional 1 Minimal Position optional 0 Maximal Position optional 0 Allowed Command Value 0 to leave minimal Position Allowed Command Value 0 to leave maximal Position smo Cao Dear IEC61850 8 1 AddCause Check Behaviour eren kreie 7 Data Port ie NEU Poll String Offset Set Point optional 0 Control Model will be always changed dynamically after reset Contro adel IEC61850 a eberle A ICD Template sAddr Type ASCIIx61850 Record Type SP Setpoint Setting group The behavior of scale setting for DoublePoint Boolean and other types is different Properties E Name Value name f sAddr 5 53 53 0 132 0 53 0 0 REGSW1 SChk Chk Val Off 3 Bit 7 Val 1 Chk sAddr Editor Functional constr
228. on Table 72 C37 118 Time synchronization Setting Format Range Default Description Time source checkbox NTP Read only NTP time source Synchronize all devices checkbox Unchecked Option whether synchronize all connected to ELAN devices connected to ELAN Sync period of con min 0 to 999 1 Synchronization period of con nected devices nected devices NTP primary server IP 4x 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 NTP primary server IP address address NTP secondary server 4x0 to 255 0 0 0 0 NTP secondary server IP ad IP address dress Page 168 C37 118 Settings 19 3 2 a eberle A Internal communication Internal communication page allows user to set parameters of internal communication with RegSys device Internal communication Baud rate of device serial port Bd 115200 v Parity EVEN se ON time of serial LEDs ms 100 Timeout for reception of first char ms 200 Inter character timeout ms 150 TX blocking ms 50 Cont Figure 94 C37 118 Internal communication Table 73 C37 118 Internal communication Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of de Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate of device serial port vice serial port values in combo box Parity Selectionof EVEN Parity of device serial port values in combo box ON time of serial ms 1to 65535 100 ON time of serial LEDs LEDs Timeout for re ms 1to 65535 200
229. on WinConfig in Step by Step mode Page 267 We take care of it Page 268 21 6 21 7 Setting Format Range Default Description Time Source Option box NTP Selection of time source NTP server IP 4x 1 to 254 0 0 0 0 IP address of NTP server 2nd NTP Server 4x 1 to 254 0 0 0 0 IP address of second alternative NTP server Devices Devices step displays devices contained in the settings User can modify configuration by un checking the individual device via the Enabled Check box option User can also change identifiers of individual devices by the dentifier textbox WIENER CR 5 Device s Qurek neip s Please configure your device s With the enable checkbox you can disable one or more devices of a former selected Nr Enabled Device Identifier template E g if you have 6 Eberle devices 1 to be connected to a REG PE and there is b i Ak J no template with a fitting number of Eberle 2 devices you are able to choose an 8 4 Device template and deselect two of them all u Device 5 en eee gen The Devices column is a read only section This should create the binding between the 6 device number and the device type This 7 allows the binding of Device type and a ae _ Device4D Identifier The Identifier is the internal name of the Eberle device connected to the telecontrol board Whenever several devices are connected to a single communication hardware each Eberl
230. on REG P IEC103 Table 104 IEC103 settings REG P Setting Format Range Default Description Link address 1to 254 1 Link address ASDU Address 1to 254 1 ASDU address Baud rate Selection of values in 19200 Speed of IEC103 serial port combo box Wardware Siprotocolit gt Devices Download Finishing 3 COM Server cult ner s Please configure your protocol The IP address is the Ethernet based physical name The IP address always consists of 4 octets each with values from Telecontrol board IP settings lt 0 255 gt separated by dots Ac IP address 192 168 56 90 example of a valid IP address would be we e 192 168 1 5 In general it is defined by Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 SCADA engineer The predefined Port of nF __ COM Server is set to 1023 Gateway 192 168 1 43 ea Subnet mask The netmask defines how much Nodes are allowed to communicate in a network or a subnetwork The netmask always consists of 4 octets each with values from lt 0 255 gt separated by dots A common example of a valid netmask would be 255 255 255 0 In general it is defined by SCADA engineer Gateway If a telecontrol board is connected to a subnet and needs to interact with stations outside that subnet the Gateway defines the IP address of the device connecting hnth crihnate eave thie entry emnty if s cance zen comme Figure 169 Protocol selection REG P CSO Table 105 CSO settings REG P
231. on 30 according to standard IEC 60870 5 103 Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 300 ms IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 103 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description Sampling rate 1to5 3 Defines a sampling frequency factor divisor 1 3 instance for value 2 2 Samples of three each are deleted Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 3 Full scale valua 1to 32767 Defines the maximum amplitude a tion in records 1000000 disturbance data can present If the amplitude exceeds the limit REG PE D halves the maximum amplitude to ensure the values up to Full scale valuation Value is configurable in the range 1 32767 The default value is 32767 12 5 Device x 12 5 1 Device settings Device Request Settings Data class used Identifier of device Dasta class Class type Number of read 256 byte records Comment 2 C_3s_1 interval 3 sec v Figure 50 IEC103 Device x PQI D Page 104 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Table 30 IEC103 Device x Device settings PQI D Setting Format Range Default Description Dataclass used Option boxes Yes Usage of Data class Identifier of 3 characters Q1 Identifier of device device Data class Selection of val 1 C_s2_1 in Data class uesin combo box terval 200 ms Class Type Selection of va
232. on REG PE TK860 YY 16C104_REGD_BASIC xml df 3 l perpen a 3 3 e e 3 3 7 7 je gt r F F H F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F xa creer KKKKKKKKEKKKKKAKEKKANM Figure 3 Settings tree Each setting can be drilled down to sets of editable pages Clicking the text in the tree struc ture selects the corresponding page in the right frame of WinConfig window Work with protocol settings Page 27 We take care of it Page 28 9 2 9 2 1 Main menu buttons New create new settings based on a default template User has to enter desired telecontrol board type protocol SCADA and device template WinConfig creates new settings according to the selected options If the selected SCADA and device template are not defined in WinConfig a default template will be used instead Default settings are based on successful experience in the field and should only be changed if there is good reason to do so Open open existing XML settings file or open then convert an existing INI settings file to the newer XML settings format User has to enter browse the required settings file and enter the target type of the telecontrol board in case of conversion from the older INI format URemove remove selected settings from the tree in the WinConfig window Selected settings are marked with an orange background To select settings click the root node of th
233. onfig launches a local web server and a default web browser on your PC Should one of the expressions used in this document be unclear to you you may refer to the glossary at the end of this document for an explanation of it Otherwise please feel free to contact us with your technical questions at this email address info a eberle de Mohican server TCP port management and WinConfig logging The default TCP port used by Mohican web server is port 8080 To avoid conflict in the case when this port is occupied WinConfig always tests whether TCP port 8080 is free If not then WinConfig tries to increment the port number and finds the first free port Such port number is written in the WinConfig configuration file and this number is consequently used for the WinConfig operation The described test is performed always when WinConfig is launched The WinConfig software creates two log files e The log files created by C libraries These files are created in the WinConfig installation folder and are named accord ing to the format YYYY MM DD WinConfig log where YYYY MM DD is date of the log file creation The maximum depth of the log files is 10 days older files are de leted when WinConfig is launched e The log files created by Mohican web server The logging created by Mohican web server is switched off by default The logging can be switched on by editing the following line in the Mohican conf configuration file placed in the WinConfig installation
234. ontrol Boards
235. or selected Data Object is available settings editor Locked data in form is defined by Sub scriber The behavior of scale setting for DoublePoint Boolean Quality and other command types is different Tasks Configuration GOOSE Licht ICDfile Log GOOSE Control Blocks Object Editors General settings for GOOSE GOOSE4ight Input Object Configuration us II GoCb_RegATCC Input Activate V Comment PG_LS PG_CB GOOSE Light Subscriber Configuration Settings rol_ Data Publisher No DataSet IED_ACTRL LLNOSDataSet2 E fel om m ago d Ji D ACTRL LLNOS 9 Num 1 PG_LS PG_CB Logical Device for command Station LDevice A lum d Sg e Order number in Dataset 1 9 Num 5 PG_TR2 PG_IS2 i EI Num 0 QUALITY ALARM Command execution activate EI B g Ide 1 GoCb_RegATCC Data Quality order quality value X ee sand kenn dup 2 AN b22 1 ANb23 0 AND24 9 Num 6 ATCC 1 OpCntRs q lg Num 7 ATCC 1 TapChg valW Tr posVal Control Type IEC BOOLEAN ge Boolean Command behaviour Type Double command without space inverted 1 or 4 Example fvalue FALSE kenn dup 2 AN b22 1 AN b23 0 AN b24 2 Ok Cancel m r Figure 128 External Dataset Object Settings Page 196 IEC61850 20 2 12 20 3 IEC61850 a eberle Ze Actions log All events open and save files add and delete nodes change sAddr stored in t
236. ork interfaces that transmit the same data sim ultaneously The redundancy monitoring protocol then makes sure that the recipient uses only the first data packet and discards the second If only one packet is received the recipi ent knows that a failure has occurred on the other path The parallel redundancy protocol is described in the IEC 62439 3 standard Work with protocol settings Page 43 We take care of it Page 44 9 3 Compare settings function Two compare modes can be found on the WinConfig Compare settings page Select the de sired mode in the Compare mode frame Compare selected settings with settings file To compare a pair of settings browse two xml setting files to compare and then click the Compare button Compare two settings files To compare a currently selected settings with an xml setting file browse this file and click the Compare button Results of the comparisons are available in a Microsoft Excel xls file that is created from this comparison Individual sets of settings are arranged in individual sheets in Excel workbook Differences can be seen colored in the Excel sheets Black fonts are used for matching pairs of settings magenta fonts for different pairs and red fonts for missing settings Compare settings Compare mode Compare selected settings with settings file Compare two settings file First settings file Second settings file r Operation Status Activity F
237. orner of the win dow Runthe standard setting and data transfer wizard from the Step by Step button Run complete WinConfig from the Advanced button Quit WinConfig using the Quit button nb TELECONTROL ke e tina WinConfig 11 0 6 WEEN based Figure 2 Introductory window Important note If user tries to run WinConfig from read only medium CD DVD a warning message ap pears instead of the introductory window Work with protocol settings WinConfig can be used for creation and modification of communication protocol settings If the settings file was created by a previous version of generator e g GenReg INI file then WinConfig can be used also for conversion of INI file to the XML file of settings used by WinConfig The communication protocol settings file can be transferred into the memory of the tele control board WinConfig always appends corresponding firmware code to the settings thus the matching pair of settings and code is always transferred as a pair The user can also read the settings from the telecontrol boards and show the settings in the WinConfig window using the transfer to PC function This function is not available for TK509 telecontrol boards Introductory window a eberle A 9 1 Settings tree WinConfig can have more than one settings open all settings are shown in tree structure in the left frame of WinConfig window The selected settings have an orange background 4 1EC104
238. page Available board services check buttons to enable disable board services Enable www pages this option enables disables online WinConfig installed in the board If www pages are disabled user can manage the board by menu system Enable SSH SFTP this option enables the online console access to board via menu system Work with protocol settings Page 37 We take care of it WinConfig uses special algorithm for transfer of software necessary to run the application program and settings The sequence of individual steps can be automatically modified according to the software ver sion and actions needed for complete update of software stored in the board Step Explanation Preparation of up grade mode Detection of kernel and ramdisk version switching the tele control board to upgrade mode Creating backup Creation of backup of application and settings applicable only in the case when kernel will be updated Waiting for backup creation Applicable only in the case when kernel will be updated Transfer of backup to PC Applicable only in the case when kernel will be updated Transfer of kernel and or ramdisk from PC Applicable only in the case when kernel and or ramdisk is updated Waiting for kernel and or ramdisk trans fer Applicable only in the case when kernel and or ramdisk is updated Transfer of backup from PC Applicable only in the case when kernel was updated
239. porary and is valid only during the time of data transfer TK400 telecontrol board Detection of board is performed by COM Server program CS or CSO that has to be ena bled and running in board memory Remote operations without running CS cannot be performed while manual Ethernet transfer is still available Ethernet operations are not available for DNP3 protocol Data transfer from to board is done via Ethernet booter program NBOOT that runs after card reset Temporary change of IP settings applies also to NBOOT TK8xx telecontrol board Temporary change of IP settings applies to one or two TK885 board interfaces according to the IP configuration of board and connected PC Original board IP settings are automati cally renewed after successful data transfer or after approximately 5 minutes timeout in the case of connection breakage during transfer Ethernet protocol running on board IEC104 is interrupted during transfers Data transfers from to TK8xx boards are done via secured HTTPS protocol Survey of cases when Ethernet data transfers cannot be performed Telecontrol board is connected via LAN with router or firewall which prevents tele grams used by WinConfig from passing through PCwith running WinConfig has two or more Ethernet interfaces connected to the same subnet Work with protocol settings a eberle A There is no free IP address in the connected subnet to be used for re addressing of tel econtrol board
240. ption EI Relay wit Trocose v f m REGAUTO Auto Manual ID Reay w D Operate on object sl REGhoeher 1 Raise Tap o Relay 13 Operate on object 7 B wl REGtiefer 1 Lower Tap Figure 76 DNP3 commands REG PE D Table 55 DNP3 commands REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description Output type selection of values Relay Output type in combo box Obj index Oto 255 1 Object index Control code selection of values Operate on Control code in combo box object Scale selection of values 1 Scale valid for analog in combo box data type Command string text 50 characters empty Command string Description text 50 characters empty User description DNP3 settings REG PE D Page 145 We take care of it 16 CSO settings REG P CSO settings are used for COM Server Only firmware type Only one tree branch with set ting is available Changes of Communication settings of REG P are recommended for advanced user only Settings description CSO_XXX_TK400 REG P TCP IP settings Local REG P IP address 192 168 56 90 Gateway IP address Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Accept any valid client IP Refuse second connection Authorized central stations IP addresses TCP port data transfer 1023 UDP port remote parameterization 12000 Device communication settings Baud rate of serial port Bd Timeout of device responses
241. r mode according to the manual press reset button of telecontrol board wait until serial booter runs and click the Manual transfer from DC button Wait cca 30s after restart for TK400 REG P type Manual transfer from PC Work with protocol settings 9 2 9 PE D a eberle Figure 8 Manual transfer from PC If manual transfer function is selected user has to prepare a eberle device rack for data transfer manually Ethernet transfer click the Manual transfer from PC button first and then reset the tele control board WinConfig waits until Ethernet booter runs changes temporarily its topical IP settings establishes TCP connection and performs required data transfer All actions are performed automatically Serial transfers put the a eberle device in loader mode reset telecontrol board and wait until the serial booter runs Then click the Manual transfer from PC button Comment Serial null modem cable with modem signals RTS CTS has to be used to enable hardware handshaking during data transfer Transfer settings from PC function for telecontrol boards type REG HTTPS data transfer is used for transfer of settings optionally with or without firmware Linux Kernel and TK8xx RAM disk in the case of TK8xx telecontrol board type Correct REG PED version has to be selected using radio buttons in the case when the telecontrol board firmware Linux Kernel and TK8xx RAM disk is also transferred Login information
242. r of de text AA or A 1 to 9 AA Identifier of device as appears vice to Z 1 to 4 in the device communication Poll type selection of values RPS Device poll type in combo box Poll string text 23 chars RPS 4 Device poll string IEC101 settings Setting RPS specific Size of answer Format byte Range 1to 255 Default 244 a eberle A Description Size of answer RPS specific Offset of seconds field byte Oto 255 18 Offset of seconds field RPS specific Offset of msec field byte Oto 255 22 Offset of msec field Device Request Settings Data class used Yes ONo Identifier of device A Poll string RPS 4 420f14 Size of answer byte 247 Type of seconds field INT32U ze Offset of seconds field byte 18 Type of msec field INT16U ze Offset of msec field byte E Comment REG D Figure 26 IEC101 device request settings for REG PE D Table 10 IEC101 device settings for REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description Data class used Option boxes Yes Usage of Data class Identifier of de 3 characters AA Identifier of device vice Poll string 24 characters RPS 4HA20f14 Poll string Size of answer byte 1 to 294 247 Size of answer Type of seconds Selection of INT32U Type of seconds field field values in combo box Offset of seconds byte Oto 255 18 Offset of seconds field field T
243. r to generate self signed certificate 2 created files For more information about certificates please consult the publicly available information in the Internet All necessary actions for rewriting the default certificates can be done on Certificates page To submit user certificates browse the certificate files and transfer them to the telecontrol board by Submit button Work with protocol settings Page 41 We take care of it Transfer offiles All certificate and key files are expected in PEM format Intermediate certificate file Certificate file Key file HTTPS access Operation Progress Status Activity Go to Transfer from PC page Figure 12 REG PE D board certificates Page 42 Work with protocol settings 9 2 14 a eberle 9 2 13 Bonding The Ethernet interface bonding is a software feature to achieve higher security If the fea ture is activated then Ethernet interfaces have the same MAC and IP addresses This leads to redundancy in the case or broken Ethernet cable When the bonding option is switched ON the firmware uses the Ethernet interface via which the connection was established and in the case of connection breakage link is down because of broken or disconnected Ethernet cable the firmware automatically switches to the second bonded interface that works as backup The Use Ethernet interface bonding option and dual Ethernet ports are available only for TK885 board type
244. rd and for transfer of files between board and PC computer e g WinSCP for MS Windows GFTP for MS Windows and Linux or possibly SFTP PSFTP for the command line mode The following files can be found in the board memory and transferred to PC e current XML settings e ICD file for 61850 protocol WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED Page 19 We take care of it Page 20 e files with information about hardware SW version system kernel log etc The XML settings and ICD file are placed in the xload actual folder and files with infor mation about HW etc are placed in the folder xload info The XML settings and ICD file can be replaced and thus new configuration can be installed using SFTP It is also possible to transfer SSL certificates with key that are used for HTTPS communication with WinConfig or to change debugging logging parameters as defined in the Supervisory page of WinConfig The debugging logging parameters can be changed without need of board restart However the most of parameter changes require restart of board that can be also done via SFTP Use always the xload new folder when transferring files from PC to board The xload new folder is scanned by firmware approximately every 20 seconds and firmware starts required action in the case when relevant files are found in the folder WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED a eberle A 6 3 3 Actions supported by firmware and their usage e Restart of board Prep
245. re Conditions Acknowledgement Ele SDI Oper Common H 9 IEN Control Type IEC DOUBLEPOINT 20 B ss MultiCommand activate moi DON LTCBIk Ag ONCIV Single Command AY DO LodA Settings Ki DOI Auto Command aa q20 f requp 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 89 DOI BndCir pn SDi mag Command Behavior vm SDi units Type Command with value default 0 D 8 4 SDIsvC Example 95 DOI TapChgFail value 00 aa q20 regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q200 raue Fvae Wil 3a 920 regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q201 Ee e Im z DON OvLogMem free D 2an20 regup 1 eee regdown 1 20 9203 ma DO Ow Ag DON OVA Figure 135 Control Value Configuration Single Command Table 81 Control value settings Common Control Type IEC Defines the corresponding IEC control data type Multi command The parameter defines using of the multi command CO data attribute Leave unchecked for single command Single command Field Section XXXX Normally this parameter is used as exponent with single commands If a Command Boolean or DoublePoint IEC control data type is used scale has special meaning See below The parameter can be adjusted from 127 128 By default set to 0 Page 204 IEC61850 a eberle A Form entry Description sAddr Editor Functional constraint CO Control Common Control Type IEC INT32 z Multi Command activate F Single Command Setti
246. ribed attributes are used to generate a project specific MMS context from SCL file The project specific file with extension ICD is located in settings with xml file WinConfig and SCL_Config engineering Tool represent for REG PE REG PED all data attrib utes as product IED model IED Server Logical Device Figure 97 Product IED Model IED substation automation SA device performing SA functions by means of logical nodes LNs It allows access via the communication system and is the only access point to the data of the logical devices and logical nodes contained in the server LDevice a logical device LD according to IEC 61850 7 2 that is contained in the serv er of IED LNode a logical node LN The LN contains Data DO which other logical nodes re quest and it may need DOs contained in other LNs to perform its function The offered DOs server capability are described in ICD file DO the DATA contained in the LNs The tree view sub entries of the server are directly resolved from the name space of the ICD file SCL_Config engineering Tool This Tool lets you do the following creating new project of WinConfig settings with ICD file 1EC61850 IEC61850 a eberle A creating new project of archive jffs2 tar with ICD file from a template project or other archive creating new project of WinConfig settings from archive jffs2 tar viewing the ICD file in a tree str
247. rning warns of physical injury Caution warns of damage to property Structure of a warning A Nature and source of the danger W Actions to avoid the danger SIGNAL WORD 1 2 Notes Notes on appropriate use of the device 1 3 Other Symbols Instructions Structure of instructions W Guidance for an action Hl Indication of an outcome if necessary Lists Structure of unstructured lists List level 1 List level 2 Structure of numbered lists 1 List level 1 2 List level 1 1 List level 2 2 List level 2 Page 10 User Guidance 2 1 a eberle A Scope of Delivery Scope of Delivery WinConfig Software available on FTP ftp a eberle user eberle ftp a eberle de public SCADA WinConfig 11 or at the Download Centre of our Homepage http www a eberle de User Manual RS232 cable RPL Loader Software available on FTP ftp a eberle user eberle ftp a eberle de public SCADA REG PE X Loader Supported Software Table 1 Topical software state at the 2012 10 10 Name DOO Date 19 09 2012 Firmware REG PE Supported XML settings from WinConfig Settings can be found in direc XML settings file settings xml tory mnt jffs2 param other files and directories are only temporary generated from settings xml after each restart Images Firmware ramdisk uRamdisk BusyBox common libraries and utilities Kernel kernel tgz Linux kernel for TK860 TK860_D
248. rver is also part of the WinConfig offline version Glossary Combo Box A text box combined with a List Box within a software program FTP File Transfer Protocol Group box A named rounded box typically enclosing a group of one or more buttons GUI Graphical User Interface HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure IOA Information Object Address SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition VM Virtual Machine TSDU Telegram Service Data Unit XML Extensible Markup Language WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED WinConfig Software introduction WinConfig is software for managing of firmware and communication protocol settings of telecontrol boards and modules REG P REG PE REG PED placed into a eberle device racks WinConfig is a web based program for creation and management of files containing protocol settings for two way transfer of settings and firmware from a user PC to REG P REG PE REG PED boards and modules and for identification of REG P REG PE REG PED devices connected to the network Telecontrol board firmware has to be equipped with COM Server to identify itself within the network COM Server is part of all IEC101 IEC103 and IEC104 protocols installed as firmware and accessible by the WinConfig environment COM Server cannot work in TK519 and TK509 REG P types because Ethernet connections are not available with these board types WinConfig program equipment consists of web server Mohican equipped with active pages for
249. rvers It is applied for the all attached devices according to the selected Strategy of the device time synchronization Value is configurable in the range 0 255 The default value is5 20 10 6 1 UTC Settings by REG Sys equipment Connect the REG Sys REG D REG DP PQI D and EOR D IED COM1 by using the delivered RS 232 Null Modem Cable with your PC Use a terminal program e g WinReg for the UTC settings If the regulator has the station ID A you will see after pressing the button lt A gt Afterwards you can take following time zone settings utcTZ lt time zone gt Time Zone 12 0 12 hours part of an hour e g 9 75 utcDST lt use dst gt Daylight Saving Time O not used 1 used utcSH lt south hemisphere gt Hemisphere O north 1 south The system is now adjusted for correct time synchronization Example settings for Germany time zone 1 daylight saving time and north hemisphere utcTZ 1 TimeZone 1 utcDST 1 Daylight Saving Time Yes utcSH 0 South Hemisphere No 1EC61850 tere d N 20 10 7 Internal communication This tree branch contains settings concerning the internal communication between telecon trol board and the device Internal communication Serial communication Serial port Baud rate of device serial port Bd 115200 v Parity ON time of serial LEDs ms Cycle time of poll ms Maximum timeout between sequenced ASCII Data ms 800 Cycle
250. s protocol specific settings step 3 Available controls in step 3 are protocol dependent so the appearance of this window changes according to the selections of previ ous steps Hardware gt Siprotecoli gt Devices Download Finishing ick hel 3 IEC 60870 5 101 Wick hele d Please configure your protocol unstructured The Link address is the device s physical name Please use this entry to enter the Link address in a unstructured decimal way The unstructured value auto updates the structured entries In general the Link Link address unstructured Link address structured 1 1 ASDU Address unstructured ASDU Address structured address is defined by SCADA engineer 1 o 1 Dependent on that SCADA definition the allowed values are lt 1 254 gt one byte or O Enable Originator lt 1 65534 gt two byte Baud rate Wee 19200 v Link address structured The Link address is the device s physical name You can use this section to enter the Link address in structured byte separated way highbyte left lowbyte right The Use COM Server function structured values auto update the unstructured entry In general it is defined Don t use COM Server function by SCADA engineer ASDU Address unstructured You can use this entry to enter the protocol enerifie AGNI Arkrirass ralen known ac a Ccana Sound Ccontmz Figure 167 IEC101 settings Table 103 IEC101 settings Setting Format Ra
251. se Active backup policy The 2 Ethernet interface is available only for REG PED TK885 board type One of the de fined gateways can be selected as default gateway by the radio button Gateway used To switch off the bonding of Ethernet interfaces check the Use Ethernet interfaces inde pendently checkbox To use PRP V1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol check the Use PRP checkbox Submit certificates for REG PE D telecontrol boards Security certificates are used for HTTPS communication with REG PE D telecontrol board Telecontrol boards are supplied with default factory certificates that can be rewritten by user certificates The certificates are used by board as its own authentication information The user certificate can be obtained from the Certification Authority CA or generated by a special program e g OpenSSL The certificates have to be in the PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail format other formats can be converter to PEM using appropriate program The certificate typically consists of certificate file and key file If the certificate is issued by CA then there is also CA certificate file and possibly also intermediate certification file in the case when Intermediate certification authority is used by CA The key file must not be password protected to be accepted by REG PE D In the case when a special program is used for generation of certificate it is possible to generate CA or to use CA that is already available 3 created files o
252. ssion 110 Kbytes disturbance data per COM Server needs aboutabout 35 sec ComServer settings PQI D ComServer settings for PQI D and also for REG PE D type telecontrol boards shows com mon parameters in the basic view To show and edit also parameters intended for advanced user click the Extend button Warning message is displayed before WinConfig shows advanced parameters as change of these parameters can affect the ComServer func tionality COM Server m COM Server Use COM Server function Don t use COM Server function O Timeout for response ms 2000 Confirm Reset Add Insert Delete Row count 1 Inactivity i ate Connection type TCP port timeout port Baud rate FIRTS CTS s DOS neu m ES His To change serial port interface go to Serial ports assignment page Serial ports assignment Figure 43 IEC103 advanced settings PQI D ComServer Table 22 IEC103 ComServer settings PQI D Setting Format Range Default Description Use Don t use Com Option Don t use Option to select whether Com Server function box Server will be used IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 89 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description Timeout for response ms 1to 2000 Timeout for response 65535 Page 90 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Table 23 IEC103 ComServer settings PQI D Channels Setting Format Range
253. sssceceessececeeseececeeseeeeceesaeeeceesaeeeceesaeseceesaeeeeeses 143 DNP3 commands REG PE D ccccccccessssceceessecececsececeeseeeceesaeeeceesseeecsesaeeeceesaseeceesaeeeseees 145 CSO settings REG P ucn ale 147 CSO settings REG PE D Channel 148 EO oA A AELE A e A E E EE EEA E ek 150 MODBUS basic settings cccccecssssececeescessencaecececscsesesaeaeeeeeessseseuaeaeceeecessesesaeaeseessessesesaeens 151 MODBUS TEP Basic Settings runs ernennen ek 152 MODBUS Advanced Settings u a sera sie 154 Device communication settings for MODBUS nennen 155 MODBUS device settings can a a a elek 156 MODBUS indicationsan anee ee 157 MODBUS Commands nenne eine 158 37 118 Dasic settings a a Rn 159 37 118 Serial Ports Settings Run 160 C37 118 SCADA Settings nah 161 637 118 ComServer d LTC 162 C37 118 Supervisory Setting S seisnes aeiee eeaeee A Ee E EErEE EE EEEE aiia 166 37 118 linked Devices euer 167 37 118 Time Synchronizati E 168 C37 118 Internal communication 169 C37 118 Device Request Setting 170 List of Tables a eberle Table 75 CROCHET 171 Table 76 Status Data Configuration Data 200 Table 77 Keyword group for definition the position in poll string ccccccccsssssssseeeeeeessessnseeeeeeeens 200 Table 78 Keyword group for event type definition cccccsccceceesesssseceeeeeceseeseaeeeeeeseessessaeaeeeeeens 201 Table 79 Keyword group for definition the directed
254. status object to 0 Without value Set Event sets the status object to one Without value Value Event sets encapsulated value to the status Without value object DpHi Event answers to the purpose Higher in Without value complex DPS data status It sets anyway its TRUE as 10 by means any or all gate DpLo Event answers to the purpose Lower in Without value complex DPS data status It sets anyway its TRUE as 01 by means any or all gate 20 6 1 2 IEC61850 Mapping with Extended Lexical Elements Here there are some examples shortly of the different ways to use this notification Example DPS complex status object mapping Extended syntax setting is SEvn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 DpHi Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 DpLo Page 201 We take care of it Page 202 Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Leg Device Properties IED E fbe gt ee LN Goose Extensions GGIO 4 Ss stVal S 48 LD REGDP1 REGDP1 sAddr 2 51 51 0 0 0 Evn Bool Of 19 Bit 0 DpHi Evn Bool Off 1 LN LLNO LLNO LN LPHD LPHD 1 5 3 LN GGIO1 GGIO 1 5 3 LN GGIO2 GGIO 2 m r 0 LN ANCR ANCR 1 sAddr Editor R D LN GGIO3 GGIO 3 Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands AY DOI Mod g DO Beh Common Settings GOOSE light DPS Events 3 2 DO Health Behaviour as Event Settings 2 DO DPSin1 Auxiliary Group Group 0 m 7 NA Extended S
255. stem confirmation of operation is required A not system DO has a DA with name dataNs ICD can have more than one of Logical Node same type that means all these DO will be removing List of LN will be shown and confirmation of operation is required removing DOI from LNode excluding empty Data Sets excluding Reports without data set N e e DataTypeTemplates when an user closes project removing unused DO s types from the section We take care of it Page 184 20 2 7 is in templj KN E SS SS IS vg F LN GGIO1 GGI0 1 947 DOI Mod 947 DO Be 94 DOI Health 94 DOI NamPit os CHEN 947 DON Ind2 Og DON Ind3 F ze DON Inds of Og DOI Ind5 L 947 DON lnd 947 DON Ind OZP DOI Inds Oge DON Indg EE 8 Rename Fee w Remove DO from ICD H E Figure 107 Removing Data Objects Restore Data Objects from Template Restoring of DO is executed when an user executes the function Restore DO in applica tion Based on a template original ICD file is created inthe section DataTypeTemplates DO Type and DO for LNodeType if they are not exists DOI for all LNode of the LNodeType DataSet and Report ifthey are not exists 7 isintemp 7 LN GGIO1 GGIO 1 DON Mod DON Beh DOI Healt DON NamAlt DO Ind1 DON Ind2 ze DON Ind3 DON Inad f DON Ind5 DON Ind DOI Ind
256. sts Round time down Round time up Use UTC for time synchronization Reset 115200 7 EVEN 10 80 100 S w d DU ec Figure 83 Device internal communication settings Table 62 Device communication settings for MODBUS Setting Format Range Default Description Baud rate of device Bd Selection of 115200 Baud rate of device serial port serial values in combo box Parity Selection of Even Parity of device serial port values in combo box ON time of serial ms 0 to 65535 10 ON time of serial LEDs for indica LEDs tion of device communication Timeout for recep ms 0 to 65535 90 Timeout for reception of first char tion of first char acter Inter character ms 0 to 65535 80 Timeout between two characters timeout in telegram TX blocking ms 0t065535 30 Timeout to wait when answer was received Number of repeats Oto 255 3 Number of repeats for SYNC cycle for SYNC cycle Number of com Oto 255 1 Number of command poll repeats mand repeats Round time down option box round down Rounding time selection Round time up Use UTC for time check box unchecked Selection of usage UTC for time synchronization synchronization Modbus settings Page 155 We take care of it 18 5 Device x 18 5 1 Device settings Device Request Settings Identifier of d
257. t Description REG PE D dec From 0 0 Defines the unique index which operates as a pri Subscriber up to mary key for the extern bonded objects Read only Index 15 parameter 0 15 Subscriber check On Off off It activates subscriber activate box GOOSE MAC hex 6octet IEC61850 The parameter defines the multicast data link Address 8 address of the IEC GOOSE Input telegrams GOOSE ID string upto Test Gol The parameter defines the GOOSE lightidentifier 64 A string of GOOSE input telegram It shall be set sym identical to a unique identifier publisher bols GOOSE string upto Test_GoRe The parameter defines the fullname ofthe Goose Control 64 TA control block for IEC GOOSE Publishing without Block sym MMS Control Blocks bols It shall have a unique name in one GOOSE GOOSE Data string upto Test_GoDs The parameter defines the name of the dataset Set 64 _A being sent in IEC GOOSE sym bols Application Hex From 0 Ox3ED or The parameter defines the VLAN Appld which ID dec up 1001 in identifies the application using the VLAN 802 1q dec hex 16383 decimal 3FFF notation Failure ser ms 0 999 4000 The parameter defines maximal timeout ms for vice interval 99 the first message It is used to set a maximum time ms to wait for the first message in a subscribed GOOSE lightstream If an input GOOSE message is not received before the timer expires the sub scriber s alarm status value wi
258. t Table 67 C37 118 Serial Ports Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Enabled checkbox Checked Assignment of serial ports for proto Unchecked cols used by firmware Telecontrol protocol for internal communication with device GDASys is always checked Usage Explanation of usage of the corre sponding port Port Selection of val As defined in COM port number used for the corre ues in combo box template sponding protocol Each port can be used only for one of defined protocols C37 118 Settings 19 2 2 a eberle A Settings SCADA Settings SCADA tree branch form contains settings of SCADA related parameters namely important communication parameters of the C37 117 protocol C37 118 settings Interface settings Line type ethernet TCP v TCP port data transfer 4712 Protocol settings PMU units base identifier 100 Authorized central stations IP addresses 192 168 1 92 192 168 1 64 192 168 1 43 Mode of watchdog LED blinking ze ID Comment Name m Ii22esereson2asel 102 GDASys Nr1 50s j II 1 Figure 89 C37 118 SCADA Settings Table 68 C37 118 SCADA Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Line type Selection of Ethernet TCP Type of line for C37 118 protocol values in Ethernet serial line combo box TCP port Explanation of
259. tVal sAddr 2 50 32 0 9 0 ale u sAddr Editor Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands Common Settings GOOSE light 1 DPS Events Generic Settings IEC61850 Data Type BOOLEAN sl Device Data Type BIT_0 BYTE X seek in Poll String Fl Poll String Offset 9 Deadband 0 Deadband estimation percentage deviation v Ok Cancel Page 178 IEC61850 sAddr Editor Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands GOOSE and auxiliary Settings Using as Subscriber timeout eror alam F Number of the observed Subscriber if set as alarm Subscriber No 0 v sAddr Editor a eberle A Functional constraint ST MX Status Measurands Common Settings GOOSE light DPS Events Behaviour as Event Settings Auxiliary Group Group 0 v Extended Syntax Settings Example DPS complex status object mapping Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 DpHi Evn Bool Of 19 Bit 1 DpLo ICD Template sAddr Type ASCIIx61850 Record Type CO Control The behavior of scale setting for DoublePoint Boolean and other types is different Functional constraint CO Control Common Settings Pre Conditions Acknowledgement Properties IED Project Name Value geg EEN sAddr 3 51 0 1 aa 920 f regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Chk ChkVal AddCa sAddr Editor Common Control Type IEC DOUBLEPOINT Z Multi C
260. ta event offset 19 bit offset 0 If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 1 will be set Value FALSE ignored Second Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 Clear defines internal SPS data event off set 19 bit offset 0 If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value O will be set Value FALSE ignored Control Value Configuration The operate request is performed through the use of a Write request of the appropriate Oper structure The OperSctlVal settings and executing behavior are defined in Control Value Configura tion section The parameter OperSCheck specifies the kind of checks a control object and is defined only in ICD file All conditional tests before and after the control operations are adjustable and defined below Page 203 We take care of it 20 6 2 1 Single Command Here Multi Command is not checked If it is checked the mode will be changed to Multi Command Configuration ICDfile GOOSE Light Log Device 7 Properties Le E Melk SEE Name We os LN ATCC AATCC 1 ll name ctlVal Ag DO Mod sAddr 3 51 0 1 aa q20 if regup 1 else regdown 1 aa q20 Chk Cht g DOI Beh po DON Heath z Gaz DOI Loc 4 EK DO OpCntRs m D 2 9 DOI TapChg sAddr Editor E SDI valWTr i Le DMa Functional constraint CO Control 9 DAI ctlModel Common Settings P
261. te The parameter defines the using of data attribute in internal device data If No not mapped in internal data has been selected there is not corresponding offset in internal poll device data GOOSElight Using as Subscriber timeout error alarm The parameter defines the using of data attribute for reporting about timed out GOOSE telegram which occurs with waiting timeout expira tion Number of the observed Subscriber if set as alarm The parameter defines the subscriber index for timeout error reporting DPS Events Auxiliary Group The parameter defines any auxiliary flag for future using It is not appli cable now Extended Syntax Settings Defines the complex behavior rules and event processing for status object 20 6 1 1 Extended Lexical Elements Format To define the complex behavior rules and event processing for status objects there are ad ditional lexical elements which are used by means of additional extended syntax settings setting Any new rule must start with the lexical element The character nored works as a separator between lexical elements The space character is ig It is necessary to note that syntactically all language rules are case insensitive The following is a list of used Lexical elements 1 Lexical element SEVN It defines data status behavior if a current event occurs 2 Lexical elementSCMD Not used yet Each Lexical element m
262. terrogation Gr 1 selection of values in list box No Group 1 in general interrogation Gr 2 selection of values in list box No Group 2 in general interrogation Gr 3 selection of values in list box No Group 3 in general interrogation Gr 4 selection of values in list box No Group 4 in general interrogation IEC104 settings Page 129 We take care of it Page 130 The available types of information objects are stated in the following list TI30 Single point information with time tag T131 Double point information with time tag TI9 TI34 Measured value normalized value Measured value normalized value with time tag TI13 TI36 Measured value short floating point value Measured value short float ing point value with time tag T145 T158 Single command Single command with time tag T146 T159 Double command Double command with time tag TI47 TI60 Regulating step command Regulating step command with time tag TI48 TI61 Set point command normalized value Set point command normalized value with time tag TI49 TI62 Set point command scaled value Set point command scaled value with time tag TI50 TI63 Set point command short floating point value Set point command short floating point value with time tag IEC104 settings 14 14 1 a eberle A DNP3 settings REG P Chapter DNP settings describes only settings not described above Bas
263. time of device status check ms Number of repeats for SYNC cycle Number of poll repeats Round time down N GA Device IP address request repetition D Double point events Insensitive interval ms Command behaviour Wait for change timeout ms 8000 SBO deselection timeout ms 10000 Command executed on startup Figure 162 IEC61850 Internal communication IEC61850 Page 249 We take care of it Table 99 IEC61850 Internal communication Page 250 Setting Format Range Default Description Serial port COM2 Serial port for internal communication with device read only To change serial port go to Serial ports assignment tree branch Baud rate of Bd Selection 115200 Baud rate of device serial port device serial of values port in combo box Parity Selection EVEN Serial port parity of values in combo box ON time of ms 1to 65535 10 ON time of serial LEDs serial LEDs Cycle time ms Oto 65535 300 The parameter determines the cycle time of of poll the substation call If you set the parameter to zero the call is executed as soon as possi ble Value is configurable in the range 0 65535 The default value is 150 Maximum ms Oto 65535 800 This parameter specifies how long the pro timeout gram waits for sequenced next frame data gt between 2000 Bytes or the acknowledgement for sequenced command The wait time is dependent on the ASCII Data baud rate and t
264. tings of the GOOSE Control Block Page Communication Settings allows defining MAC address GOOSE Control Block Editor Common Settings Communication Settings MAC Address 01 0C CD 01 04 01 APPID VLAN PRIORITY Ra VLAN ID Figure 119 Communication settings of the GOOSE Control Block Page Data Set shows the Data Set of the Control Block and allows editing it Functions Data Object Up Data Object Down and Remove Data Object are processing all Data Attributes records for current Data Object Functions Data Attribute Up and Data Attrib ute Down are changing order of Data Attributes records for current Data Object GOOSE Control Block Editor RemMode RemMode 6 ATCC 1 OpCntRs q 7 GGIO 4 TapPos stVal 8 co 4 Tas a 9 GGIO 7 4 i TapTrans j stVal 1 ii een Figure 120 Data Set of the GOOSE Control Block Adding the Data Object to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block is done in a device tree For the selected Data Object is used function Add DO to GOOSE Control Block Page 191 We take care of it Device Sal Add Device Remove Device EJ AddLNode E Remove LNode 5 Add DO to ICD from Template L DON ON GE DOI LodA DOI Auto DOI BndCtr Figure 121 Adding the Data Object to Data Set of GOOSE Control Block
265. tion First character ms O to 65535 25 Time of first character timeout Max timeout be s Oto 255 0 Maximum timeout between tween master master enquires requests IEC address of error O to 255 162 IEC address IOA of mul multipoint function tipoint for errors O type information undefined number IEC address of reset 0 IEC address IOA of mul command function Oto 255 tipoint for errors O type information undefined number Compatibility byte Selection of val 1 Value of compatibility byte ues in combo box Identification string 8 characters EBERLE Identification string RS485 activated option box NOT Activation of RS485 interface selected option Cause of transmis Selection of val LSA Cause of transmission tem sion template ues in combo box plate Interval between us O to 65535 293 Interval between infor information ele mation elements INT in Type ments INT in Type 23 23 Max number of 1to 2048 700 Max number of information information ele elements of a channel NOE ments ofa channel in Type 26 NOE in Type 26 Transmission delay ms O to 65535 1500 Transmission delay for ASDU for ASDU Type 23 Type 23 IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A Setting Format Range Default Description Serial flow control Selection of val Hand Serial flow control ues in combo box shake RTS OFF 12 3 3 Ethernet COM Server Working additionally as COM S
266. tion of INT32U Type of seconds field field values in combo box Offset of seconds byte Oto 255 0 Offset of seconds field field Type of msecfield Selection of INT16U Type of seconds field values in combo box Offset of msec byte 0 to 255 4 Offset of msec field field Earth faults ac Option boxes active If active selected all data with quisition earth faults will be transmitted from current device to control center Otherwise this feature not supported Note feature is supported only for EORSys devices Number of fault Oto 255 1 Maximal number of Samples files files in the EORSys device Val ue is configurable in the range 0 8 The default value is 3 Function ID for 0 to 255 151 IEC functional identify for cur faults rent device Instance in a 19 rack had mounted three EOR D devices For first EOR D Func tional Id 151 is set for second 152 and for third 153 It is needed for an identification disturbance data on the control center s side Comment 23 characters EOR D Comment IEC103 settings REG PE D 12 5 2 r Columns to hide Data points indications PQI D Indications Da a eberle 4 lt Description Disabled 100 Usein GI IOA function type information number Send once initial value IEC object type MEA number in ASDU Processing of changes REG type Bit offse P Add Insert Delete Export Import Advanced Search Row count 1
267. tions lt SubNetwork name SUBNETWORK1 type 3 MMS gt lt BitRate uni b s gt 100 lt BitRate gt lt ConnectedaP jedName REGS1 apName 1 gt lt Physconn type Plug gt lt P type e gt PO P gt lt P typ Plug gt ST lt P gt lt PhysCconn gt lt ConnectedaP gt lt SubNetwork gt lt Communi cation gt lt IED name REGS1 desc REGS1 type REGSYS manufacturer A EBERLE configversion 1 0 gt lt Services gt lt DynAssociation gt lt GetDirectory gt GetDataobjectDefinition gt lt GetDatasetvalue gt lt DataSetDirectory gt lt DataObjectDirectory gt lt Readwrite gt lt FileHandling gt lt ConfLogcontrol max 1 gt ConfLNs fixLnInst true gt lt GetcBvalues gt lt GOOSE max 5 gt lt GSESettings cbName Fix datSet Fix appID conf gt lt ConfDataset max 120 maxAttributes 67 gt lt ConfReportcontrol m 120 f gt lt Reportsettings datse Fix rptID Dyn optFields Dyn trgops Dyn intgPd Dyn gt lt services gt lt AccessPoint name P1 gt lt Server gt lt Authentication none true gt lt LDevice inst E1 desc EOR D master relay 1 gt lt LNO inst desc Common and reset IncClass LLNO InType EORD_LLNO gt ST Inclass LNO doName Mod fi Line E1 prefix lt FCDA IdInst E1 prefix InClass LLNO doName Beh fc ST gt Figure 102 Displaying t
268. to switch ON OFF individual protocols or COM Server channels Serial Ports Settings EC Enabled Usage Port TCP port Telecontrol protocol serial port COM2 we ED CSE serial port coms v Cl DCF serial port COM v TT _ Intertrigger serial port COM3 v COM Server serial port comz wel 5001 COM Server serial port COM1 v 5002 COM Server serial port COM3 5003 COM Server serial port coms zi 5013 COM Server serial port COM3 v 5023 COM Server serial port coms el 5004 COM Server serial port COM2 v 7001 COM Server serial port COM1 sl 7002 COM Server serial port com3 sei 7003 COoM Senerserialprt coma ze 7004 Figure 155 IEC61850 Serial Ports Settings Table 93 IEC61850 Serial Ports Settings Setting Format Range Default Description Enabled checkbox ON OFF Checkbox enables disables corresponding protocol COM Server channel Usage text Definition of corresponding protocol COM Server channel read only Port Selection of val Selection of corresponding COM port ues in combo box TCP port TCP port used by CS channels read only Page 233 We take care of it Page 234 20 10 2 Settings SCADA Under this Item you can Export ICD file Default values should only be changed if you re ceived an explicit instruction During the System engineering ph
269. ttings REG PE D Page 79 We take care of it Page 80 Table 19 IEC103 basic settings REG PE D Setting Format Range Default Description Settings descrip text 50 charac Short user description of set tion ters tings file WinConfig uses text stored in the template file if settings are created from tem plate Baud rate of IEC Bd Selection of 38400 Baud rate of IEC103 serial port serial values in combo box Link address of 1 to 254 Link address in the given REG P range ASDU address 1 to 254 ASDU address in the given range RS485 activated option box NOT selected Activation of RS485 interface Identifier of de text AA or A 1 to strings defined Device identifier string as ap vice 9 to Z 1 to in the Devices pears in the device protocol 4 tree branch Default values always depend on values entered in the corresponding template IEC103 settings REG PE D a eberle A 12 3 Advanced settings 12 3 1 1EC103 Settings SCADA for PQI D device Interface settings Serial port 20 M Parity EVEN ON time of serial LEDs ms Baud rate of serial port IEC Ba RS485 activated o RTSICTS o XON XOFF o Protocol settings Link address of REG PE D ASDU address Send unknown events in Gl Yes with Off M Timeout after command reception ms First character timeout ms SG Max timeout between master requests s pP IEC address of error multipoint eme IEC a
270. ucture using this tool as project independent basis to edit objects and nodes of ICD file in a comfortable way for project specific use l e a common base can be modified to fit your project depending settings viewing and editing the GOOSE publishers and subscribers Figure 98 SCADA Settings IEC61850 Version of settings V7 38 20 REG D A x1 GOOSE Configuration 214 Control version number 6300 Mode of watchdog LED blinking v Firmware version V7 38 20 REG D A x1 Standard GOOSE Configuration Firmware build ICD file name eberle43 REG Dx1 110711 Std icd Here to execute a Export ICD file Edit ICD file SCL_Config IEC61650 engineering tool TCP configuration Configure TCP Figure 99 Execute SCL_Config engineering Tool Page 173 We take care of it Page 174 20 2 1 After the adjust and save in SCL_Config engineering Tool all changes have to be activated in WinConfig automatically The tree view subentries of the server are directly resolved from the name space of the ICD file This defines that there may be different names for the logical devices and their subor dinated Nodes and their subordinated attributes That s why only an example can be discussed in the description Displaying project configuration and properties of nodes ICD file is shown as the logical structure tree on page Configuration On the right panel of the page section IED parameters are show
271. um 0 QUALITY ALARM Figure 124 External Publishers List Adding and deleting Subscribers and Data Objects Use hot keys and popup menu of the top panel to add new Subscribers and Data Objects or to delete them K Add GOOSE Subscriber bi Remove GOOSE Subscriber Z Add DO for GOOSE Subscriber Remobe DO from GOOSE Subscriber Ag Num 3 PG g Num 5 PG 9 Num 0 QU Figure 125 Adding and deleting Subscribers and Data Objects Communication and GOOSE publisher settings may be got from external ICD After select this function the new form will be shown It is need to select ICD file and GOOSE Control Block from it to check necessary data objects Selected control block and data objects will be added as new Subscriber Page 193 We take care of it Add GOOSE Publishe Publisher ICD C Select CD 5 TE Work_vc SCL_Config Docs 20110724 new task ebere43 REG Ox1 110711 Std_Goose eberle43 REG Dx1 110711 Std_Goose icd Coti lock Name Goth RegATOG OOOO DataSet Name GoDs_RegATCC LDevice Instance Data Set valWTrtransind Figure 126 Adding Subscribers and Data Objects from ICD file Page 194 IEC61850 a eberle m 20 2 11 7 External Publisher Settings For selected Subscriber is available settings editor Logical Devices list contains Logical De vices from ICD of project If publisher was loaded from external IC
272. ut space 1 2 li Regier A Se fof BEI H AS dala Tamis M Regswi 3 direct command without space 1 0 v Regier A Se ob _ DEI S pe b j masmes WljResswe sirect command without spsost110 sl Reale 50 ol ji a138 S pee Je Ton lh RESsw1 REGSw srect command without space 1 0 EI Regier A Se of bs o JS LE loueeneg wll REGSwt REGSwt direct command without space 1 0 v Regier A Se of fo fo AS Lob masm lt REGsu2 REGEn2 rect command without space 1A E Regier A Se lof xz o i2 Jo _ masmes wll RESsw2 REGSw2 ireot command without space 1 0 wll Regier A Se Figure 64 IEC104 commands Table 43 IEC104 commands Setting Format Range Default Description Common address Oto 65534 1 ASDU address of remote station au of ASDU thorized for connection with telecontrol board Information object Oto 0 IOA of the corresponding data point address IOA 16777215 or 3x Oto 255 Control code Selection TI45 TIS Type of information object of values 8 IEC104 settings Page 127 We take care of it Page 128 13 3 4 Setting Format Range Default Description in listbox Command string text 50 Command string characters Scale exponent Selection 1 0 Addition command parameter accord of values ing to the available list in listbox 100 value Oto 65535 0 100 value available for T148 only Description text 50 User description characters IEC1
273. v lt 27 gt ready for transmission of a channel x v lt 28 gt ready for transmission of tags x v lt 29 gt transmission of tags x 2 lt 30 gt transmission of disturbance values x v lt 31 gt end of transmission x v IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 75 We take care of it Information in control direction POISYS REGSYS EORSYS Devices Devices lt 7 gt general interrogation v v lt 6 gt time synchronization v v lt 20 gt general command v v lt 24 gt order for disturbance data transmission v v lt 25 gt acknowledgement for disturbance data x v transmission 12 1 3 Supported Cause of Transmission Information in monitor direction lt 1 gt spontaneous lt 2 gt cyclic lt 3 gt reset frame count bit FCB lt 4 gt reset communication unit CU lt 5 gt start restart lt 6 gt power on lt 7 gt test mode lt 8 gt time synchronization lt 9 gt general interrogation lt 10 gt termination of general interrogation lt 11 gt local operation lt 12 gt remote operation lt 20 gt positive acknowledgement of command lt 21 gt negative acknowledgement of command lt 31 gt transmission of disturbance data Information in control direction lt 8 gt time synchronization lt 9 gt initiation of general interrogation lt 20 gt general command lt 31 gt transmission of disturbance d
274. vate Retransmission Strategy Default Step Delay ms Retransmission Strategy Type Arithmetic scheme First interval ms 200 Multiplier 2 Max retransmission timeout ms 4000 Profile scheme Number of Intervals 6 Ith interval ms 1000 2th interval ms 1500 3th interval ms 2000 4th interval ms 2500 Sth interval ms 3000 6th interval ms 4000 Figure 149 GOOSE Retransmission Settings Tab Firmware supports up to 4 Control Blocks Their number is defined of ICD Communication Section For example if an ICD file contains the 3 GOOSE GSEs only these GOOSE Control blocks will be shown here The settings data elements are described in the table below Table 87 Settings of GOOSE light Name Unit Range Standard Description value Common GSE GOOSE Used Used Parameter activates deactivates IEC GOOSE activate Not service If GOOSE will be not used the service used will be deactivated It can reduce a network busy schedule Setting No switches off all GOOSE services GSE Control Y N Yes No No Parameter activates deactivates an adjustment Blocks ad use only of the published IEC GOOSE Control Blocks justment MMS which have been described in the ICD file If No activate Goose is selected REG PE REG PED publishes all GOOSE Control Control Blocks as this has been described in ICD Blocks file If the adjustment has been deactivated all following APPID and VLAN settings will be not applied
275. vel of security for data transfer and communication with REG PE D telecontrol board is used in WinConfig v 11 The online WinConfig www pages placed in the board memory can be disabled in the Transfer settings settings from PC page in offline WinConfig or in the REG PE D board IP settings page in online WinConfig or in user menu The new firmware supports several functions as described below The following secured communication technologies are used in WinConfig 11 SFTP SSH file transfer protocol replaced the online WinConfig The v 11 firmware supports several functions focused to file transfer The file transfer via SFTP proto col is encrypted and protected by user login and password remoteuser login can be used with remoteuser password factory default SSH is used instead of former telnet for remote access to console This access is typ ically used for basic board configuration A SSH client e g PUTTY is necessary for this type of connection HTTPS HTTP over SSL together with SSL certificates is used for communication be tween off line WinConfig and telecontrol board WinConfig REG P REG PE REG PED 6 3 1 6 3 2 a eberle A Note on HTTPS accounts functionality when upgrading downgrading from to WinConfig 10 When user upgrades from WinConfig 10 to 11 using offline WinConfig one of the HTTPS ac counts username and password from version 10 passwords coded by XOR not by SHA2 hash is used The accounts
276. wn checked down in scale of one second to prevent time inconsistencies with substation If value equals one time stamps are rounded up in scale of one second The default val ue is 0 Measure Option box Transmit Defines a transmitting behavior of the ments es on recep measurands If on receiving checked all transmission tion data transmitted forthright after their mode MEA changing In this case a cause of transmis sion will be spontaneous If one time per interval checked all measured values transmitted once per interval Measurements receiving inter val In this case a cause of transmission will be cyclic received value value in prozess image Transmis ms O to 65535 1000 Defines a time interval of the cyclic trans sion interval mitting the measured values Value is of meas configurable in the range 0 65535 The urements default value is 1000 ms PQI D ver Option box V2 xx Defines used version of PQI D firmware It sion of es V3 xx is very important setting firmware Incompatibility of the application setting with topical used PQI D firmware version gives wrong data and events IEC103 settings REG PE D Page 101 We take care of it Setting Format Range Default Description Command 64 charac sys Command that will be executed once after executed on ters open D first connection with device startup of qibreset REG PE D 9 sysrese t 0 Number of Oto 2
277. xtended Settings Checked Data Point Type Poll String Offset Checked Value optional Minimal Dantiann antian ll Figure 138 Condition Type behavior Extended Settings define test behavior and data point which will be checked The maximal and minimal limit position can be defined too Page 211 We take care of it Page 212 20 6 2 4 Extended Settings Checked Data Point Type BIT_7 BYTE v Poll String Offset 3 Checked Value optional 1 Minimal Position optional 0 Maximal Position optional 0 Allowed Command Value 0 to leave minimal Position Allowed Command Value 0 to leave maximal Position ECSTESO S AddCausej _oskedin Mode z Figure 139 Condition extended Settings Table 85 Predicable Condition Extended Settings Checked data Point Type Defines a checked Data Point type in Poll string Poll String Offset Defines a checked Data Point Poll string offset Checked Value optional Defines a checked value as FLOAT32 value Minimal Position optional Defines minimal position by Limit condition Maximal Position optional Defines maximal position by Limit condition Allowed Command Value to Defines command value that permitted at minimal position by leave minimal Position Limit condition Allowed Command Value to Defines command value that permitted at maximal position by leave maximal Position Limit condition Command Acknowledgement Command Acknowl
278. yntax Settings Evn Bool Off 19 Bt 0 DpHi Evn Bool Off 19 Bt 1 DpLo ev DON DPSIn2 yntax Settings vn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 DpHi Evn Off 19 Bit 1 zz DO DPSin3 Example DPS complex status object mapping Evn Bool Of 19 Bit 0 DpHi Evn Bool Off 19 Bt 1 DpLo 9 94 DO DPSin4 L Aa mas nnm r Figure 134 Example of DPS complex status IEC61850 type is DoublePoint enumeration DPos Device internal type is inapplicable because this status is not mapped in internal data and is not arranged in the poll string First Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 DpHi defines internal SPS data offset 19 bit offset 0 Its behavior fits with DPS Higher request If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 10 will be set by means any or all gate after clear of high byte If this SPS status point is set to FALSE high bit will be cleared Second Event Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 DpLo defines internal SPS data offset 19 bit offset 1 Its behavior fits with DPS Lower request If this SPS status point is set to TRUE value 01 will be set by means any or all gate after clear of lower bit If this SPS status point is set to FALSE low bit will be cleared Example Status object by means directional protection activation Extended syntax setting is SEvn Bool Off 19 Bit 0 Forw SEvn Bool Off 19 Bit 1 Back Evn Bool Off 19 Bit 3 Both IEC61850 type is DoublePoint enumeration dir lt EnumType id dir
279. ype of msec Selection of INT16U Type of seconds field field values in combo box IEC101 settings Page 61 We take care of it Page 62 10 4 2 Setting Format Range Default Description Offset of msec byte Oto 255 22 Offset of msec field field Comment 23 characters REG D Comment Indications Indications tree branch describes indications of individual device Rules for work with those settings are the same as for work with commands Indications r Columns to hide Description IEC objecttype RegSystype Information object address IOA IOA hi mi o Abs deviation Scale Max value RPS offset RPS bit Search Row count 70 Count of selected rows 0 Information WS N Sys a object A imanni A Abs A Max ajj F postition z GE Irch address zue meng deviation Scale y value le LJ mn ane u Active Master m M fet fez fo JE Hem o FE Ee E FanarAautomatik Betrieb_manual automatic oper TI2 ei r 8200 0 12 HI 0 E FE E FOE E min naralinimndn an Fi Tal sr eea E ES Hen Leem _ fk oF Figure 27 Indications The RegSys type is disabled by default To edit RegSys type use the Advanced button to en able corresponding column The same rule is valid for all protocols using RegSys type as parameter of indications Tab

Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents